JP2022079584A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet is done by operating credit feed switches 56-58, a start lever 41 is operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and lottery processing according to a bet number is carried out. Then, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped by operating stop switches 42-44, a stop symbol combination according to a lottery result of the lottery processing can be stopped. In the slot machine 10, a symbol combination as a winning which is won in a predetermined combination in three bets is set common to a symbol combination as a winning which is won in the predetermined combination in one bet.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the button is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The invention according to claim 1 is
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media,
A bet number setting means for grasping that a game medium or a virtual game medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting a bet number for a game up to a predetermined number, and a bet number setting means.
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the bet number set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number and a second bet number different from the first bet number are provided.
An effective position setting means for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is provided.
When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result is provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second specific result different from the first specific result is provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the first specific pattern combination stops at the first effective position set corresponding to the first bet number by the effective position setting means. , The first privilege corresponding to the first specific result can be given,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, and the second effective position set corresponding to the second bet number by the effective position setting means is different from the first specific pattern combination. 2 When a specific pattern combination is stopped, the second privilege corresponding to the second specific result can be given.
When the second specific pattern combination is stopped at the second effective position on the orbiting body, the position is a position that is not set as an effective position by the effective position setting means when the number of bets is the second. It is characterized in that the symbol is attached so that the first specific symbol combination is stopped at a specific position set as the first effective position by the effective position setting means in the case of one bet number. ..

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows the RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of push order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pushing order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the time of stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a continuous production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effective line and the stop symbol in the normal game mode and the specific mode as a free mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode, and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode, and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode, and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol of each combination in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol of each combination in a specific mode. It is a figure which shows the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect at the time of switching of a game mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a bet for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the start for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the winning combination correspondence processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination process for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the special zone processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the staging setting process at the time of stop for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end processing for a specific mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a specific mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific combination for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process for a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the continuous production in each mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the display effect in a bonus and each game in a bonus. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which is carrying over a bonus in a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the count process by the display control device on the sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of the acquisition number by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the specific mode switching process by the display control device on the sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of mode switching by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the specific mode setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of setting a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of setting a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transformation example of the relationship between the display effect in a bonus and each game in a bonus. (A) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the continuous effect setting process for a specific mode, and (b) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the end determination process. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for a bonus state in a specific mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of setting a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect for a mobile interlocking service by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the information input / output processing by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for an advantageous section by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the specific mode switching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of mode switching by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the MAX bet switching process by a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the outline of the modification of the identification display of a specific mode. It is a front view of the slot machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of special addition. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a figure which shows the special addition generation generation table. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows various addition tables. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference between normal addition and special addition. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a bet operation by a main control unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference between normal addition and special addition. It is a flowchart which shows the payout determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for payout. It is a flowchart which shows the process for re-game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of various addition tables. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the modification of the special addition. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of various addition tables. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process for betting operation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the credit input switch and the start lever.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by, for example, giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "red bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a "first replay" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, 18 of the left reel 32L). Second), "watermelon" symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), "white bell" symbol (eg, 12th on left reel 32L), "second replay" symbol (eg, 11th on left reel 32L) , "White 7" symbol (eg, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 5th on left reel 32L), "Youth" There are 10 types of symbols (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line where bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated depending on the number of bets on the medal are set, and when the symbol is stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line. As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out is given, and a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are shown in FIG. 8 (b). There are cases where the combination line is an effective line and cases where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (c). More specifically, if three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-sloping line L4 is considered to be the valid line, and if two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line is below. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are considered to be effective lines. Further, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is regarded as an effective line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal bet is started. Also known as a one-bet game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game is normally played. Therefore, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game may be referred to as a normal game mode, and the 1-bet game for the normal game mode may be referred to as a specific mode.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won in the normal game mode and a privilege given when the prize is won.

In the normal game mode, the small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the first small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the first small role prize. If the first small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination have different combinations of winning symbols, but in the 3-bet game, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M The "red bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. Is. For example, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If it is stopped, it will be the 5th small winning combination. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol (11th and 14th) and the "red bell" symbol are arranged at adjacent positions (12th and 15th) on the upstream side. On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position (No. 2 and 5) separated by one symbol from the "second replay" symbol (No. 0 and No. 3) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the fifth small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. If the 18th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stopped on the effective line. In that case, the 19th small winning combination will be won. If the 19th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

Similar to the 18th small winning combination, the 25th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. In the case of the 18th small winning combination, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R may stop in the middle stage only when the winning combination is duplicated with the BB ("second replay" symbol, If the "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) is the 25th small winning combination, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle row regardless of whether or not the BB has been won. Can be. If the 25th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 26th minor role It will be a prize. If the 26th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small winning combination is, for example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. The "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. If the 27th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "red bell" or "white bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol, and right If the "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the effective line, the 28th small winning combination will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol (3rd, 7th, 15th, 20th) and the adjacent position on the downstream side (2nd, 6th, 14th, 19th) ), The "first replay" symbol is arranged, and the "second replay" symbol is arranged at the adjacent position (11th) on the downstream side of the "white bell" symbol (No. 12). On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol (2nd, 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th) and the adjacent position on the upstream side (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) are "No. A "1 replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged. Therefore, when the 28th small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4, the "bell" on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, except when the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. While the symbol and the "replay" symbol are tempered, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop, which is a so-called double tempai stop roll. If the 28th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 29th small winning combination will be won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 9th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper or middle stage, and if the 29th small winning combination is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 30th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 30th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 30th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the first 31 small wins. The details will be described later, but the 31st small winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 31st small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 32nd small It will be a winning prize. If the 32nd small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

There are 1st re-game prize to 8th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. Further, when the second re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game If a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are prize modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

When the "Red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, the first BB prize is won, and when the "White 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line. When the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the second BB prize is awarded. .. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, , CB prize. If the CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from the winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. When the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 32R and the "watermelon" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" on the right reel 32R. Even when the symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "second replay" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In the following, the combination of each of the above symbols will be referred to as a transitional outcome.

The correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won and the privilege given when the winning is won in the specific mode as a one-bet game will be described in detail later.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at one time is provided. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

More specifically, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 are formed in a size having a larger operation surface operated by hand or the like than the third credit insertion switch 58. ing. Therefore, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is improved. In other words, the second credit insertion switch 57 that can be used in the one-bet game as the specific mode has the same operability as the first credit insertion switch 56 that can be used in the three-bet game as the normal game mode. It can be said that there is.

A first effect switch 66, which is operated when an effect is generated, is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the first effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first effect switch 66. Is provided. As described above, when the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are set to the normal game mode and the 1-bet game is set to the specific mode, the normal game mode and the specific mode can be set depending on the positional relationship of the corresponding credit insertion switches 56 to 58. It can be said that they are distinguished.

Further, on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, on the right side of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a second effect switch 67 used for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is provided. .. The second effect switch 67 will be described in detail later.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R in the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided. .. The push order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. The push order notification unit 68 can also be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like, an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so as to make the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or the stop switch 42 may be provided. The LED lamps may be provided adjacent to the to 44.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is referred to as an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the payout detection sensor 51a and the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. In the third credit input detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as the setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted and turned ON are connected, and the signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit The input / output port 104 includes an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), and the like. It is connected via.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

On the input side of the display control device 81, a first effect switch 66 (more specifically, a first effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the first effect switch 66) and a second effect switch 67 (more specifically, the second effect switch 67). A second effect switch detection sensor) that detects the operation of the effect switch 67) is connected. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. Hereinafter, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the output of the power failure signal is continued, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the start pre-processing, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S213 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a one-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting medals. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game prize is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the game is transformed so that the re-game prize is established even in the 2-bet game, two cards are automatically inserted. It is advisable to set the virtual medal of to be automatically inserted.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the checkout switch 59 has been operated, and if the checkout switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Further, if neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as a specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) is set. "1" and "3" are set as the specified number in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3" except in the CB state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "2" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After processing in step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result in step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the right-down line L4 is set as the effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are set as the effective line. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states in the normal gaming mode, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. Further, as the gaming state in the specific mode, there are three types of gaming states: a normal gaming state in the specific mode, a BB state in the specific mode, and a CB state in the specific mode.

In this slot machine 10, based on the lottery result of the lottery process and the stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the above 6 types or 3 types of gaming states are changed to the game playability. The specific mode in the present embodiment is a mode that imitates the playability of the normal game mode. Therefore, first, the playability of the normal game mode will be described, and later, the specific mode will be described in detail.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. .. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state of the normal gaming mode, and the normal gaming state is determined. Select a lottery table. Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state of “setting 3” in the normal game mode. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the first small winning combination to the fifth small winning combination and the 14th small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination are won is set. It is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, the winning flag indicating that the set winning flag has won the first BB (hereinafter referred to as "the first BB winning flag") or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (hereinafter, the "second BB winning flag"). If not, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set if the winning combination other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, and the first BB, the second BB, and the like are set. If you have not won a role other than CB, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/3, strong cherry. The probability of winning a prize (probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning a chance A (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/252. , The probability of winning the chance B (the probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 65500 minutes. It is 1. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, the forward push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) is about 1/164, respectively, and the middle push bell 1, The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 24 to 27) is about 1 / 16.4, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/1770. Approximately 1 / 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 / 3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 6550. It is one-third. The probability of winning the chance A duplication 1, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 1, and the chance B duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37 to 40) is about 1/3280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single prize in the first BB and the second BB (probability of winning when IV = 43, 44) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning the CB (probability of winning when IV = 45) is about 1 / 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/94.

In the lottery table for the normal game state in the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 28 to 30, 46 to 49. Therefore, in the normal game state in the normal game mode, these index values IV do not win.

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S309, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery process is completed. In the stop information setting process, when a plurality of wins are won among the small wins, replays, and bonus wins, the stop information is set in the order of priority shown below. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the stop information is set so that the small winning combination is given priority and the bonus winning is established when the small winning combination cannot be established. If the replay and bonus are won, the stop information is set so that the replay prize is given priority.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 20 to 27, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right. When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "push order bells") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established depending on the operation order.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, and the middle stop switch 43 is set. Set the stop information so that the first small winning combination is established when is operated for the first time, and the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time. Set stop information. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of 4 symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode. It can be stopped and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by 5 symbols or more, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination winning or the fifth small winning combination winning.

The second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the fifth small winning combination symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged so that the distance between the second small winning symbols (fifth small winning symbols) is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 8th "watermelon" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the 12th "white bell" The design stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Further, the fifth small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols are arranged at positions 11 and 14. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small winning combination symbol or the fifth small winning combination symbol may stop on the effective line, or both the second small winning combination symbol and the fifth small winning combination symbol may be on the effective line. It doesn't stop.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small winning combination symbol The barrel "cherry" pattern stops in the middle. As a result, there is room for the fifth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first 2 The "Red 7" symbol, which is a small role symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, the second small winning combination symbol and the fifth small winning combination symbol may be stopped in the middle stage even if the middle reel 32M is slid by four symbols and then stopped. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a timing, the No. 2 "BAR" symbol or the No. 6 "white bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage.

When the second small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small winning combination winning can be established.

The second small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "red 7" symbol reaches the lower stage, it is shown in FIG. 20 (c). As such, the second small role symbol "Red 7" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 13th "cherry" symbol reaches the lower row, the 14th "watermelon" symbol is in the lower row as shown in FIG. 20 (d). Stop. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the fifth small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the fifth small winning combination winning can be established.

The fifth small winning combination symbol on the right reel 32R is the "second replay" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "second replay" symbol is arranged at the 0th and 3rd positions. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, it is the 5th small winning combination symbol. The "second replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the 2nd small winning combination symbol and the 5th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle stage, that is, when the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the stop information 2nd In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol, and from the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol are as shown in FIG. It is a transition to.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the fifth small winning combination is established. It will be either the case where the winning is established or the case where the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol is stopped in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination prize is established regardless of the operation timing.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination is established or the shift roll is stopped on the valid line depending on the operation timing. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 29th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and if the unquestioned bell is won, the second is regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 Small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the winning result command is set in step S415 so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the medal payout process in step S213 will be outlined.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the valid line. When the transition roll is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the shift roll has not stopped on the valid line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is awarded based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine if it holds. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. Further, when the transition to the effective line is stopped in a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the step S503 is performed. The first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. The lottery table for the first RT state differs from the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17) in the point value PV of IV = 1 to 5, and has the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 49 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the normal gaming state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1 in 32.8, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is won when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and when the winner is IV = 2, the first promotion replay 1 is won, and the IV. If you win when = 3, you will win the first promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win the first promotion replay 3, and if you win IV = 5, you will win. In that case, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 1st RT state, each winning combination of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as the normal game state, while the privilege of replay is given. Changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming prize, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), a stop command is generated when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won in addition to the case where the push order bell described above is won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stopped switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, the first replay prize or the first replay prize is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The third re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game will not win a prize regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first replay. The 6th replay is assigned in addition to the 3 replays, the 1st promotion replay 3 is assigned the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is assigned. Although the 8th re-game is assigned in addition to the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game, the re-games to be won are the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game regardless of which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third replay prize is established. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize is also one type, and the third replay prize is intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This is because it can be possible to make it. It should be noted that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game prize has been established. When the third re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508 to end this process. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 49 is equal to the winning probability of each winning in the first RT state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 / 13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 is not won, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 1 / 10.5, IV = 9, respectively. , The probability of winning at 10 is about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the player shifts to the second RT state, the probability of deviation is lower than that of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the 2nd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 4th re-gaming prize that shifts to the 3rd RT state, and the 5th re-gaming Winning and is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2 Even when the promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first re-game prize or the second re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the second promotion replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game prize, the fourth re-game prize, and the fifth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game prize or the fourth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the 4th re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the 4th re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a random pattern, "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a different color 7 symbol middle stop, and "3" is a symbol that is red 7, red 7, and BAR middle stop. Corresponding to the combination, "4" corresponds to the symbol combination of white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stage stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a disparity is stopped and the fourth replay prize is established, or a unique 7 The symbol combination that stops in the middle of the symbol stops, and the 4th re-game prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination processing, It is determined whether or not the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has been established. If the 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are not established, this process is terminated as it is. When the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process is terminated.

When the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the third RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the third RT state differs in the point value PV of IV = 9 to 12, and has the same point value PV as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to the winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9,10. At that time, it will not be won, and the probability of winning at IV = 11 and 12 will be about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the winning mode is that the small winning combination, the re-gaming, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the 2nd RT state, while the privilege of the re-gaming is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, and the 6th re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, 7 Re-game prize, 8 re-game prize, and 3rd re-game prize that shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set the stop information.

FIG. 23 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. If BAR Replay 1 is won, any of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 7th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true. If BAR Replay 2 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 8th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, the CB winning flag, the special first BB flag, and the special second BB flag is set. The special first BB flag and the special second BB flag are flags corresponding to the special first BB and the special second BB that can be elected in the specific mode. The special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB are bonus combinations corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, CB It will be a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so that the distance between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets of the medal has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the valid line setting processing (step S207), the lower line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are determined. Is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, the lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 45, and "16384" is set as the point value of IV = 46 to 49. Is set (see Fig. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/4.0, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 (IV = 47). (Probability of winning at the time) is about 1/4.00, and probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning at IV = 48) is about 1/4.0, CB The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 1/4.00. No outlier event occurs.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. Although detailed explanation is omitted, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, even if any of the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 4 is won, some small winning combination will be won. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if the 1st small role prize, the 18th small role prize, the 19th small role prize, and the 25th small role prize are established, 15 medals will be paid out and the first If 2 small winning combination to 17th small winning combination and 20th small winning combination to 24th small winning combination are established, 14 medals will be paid out. That is, when the state shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the CB is won only in the normal game mode, and is not won in the specific mode.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the special first BB prize, or the special second BB prize is established in step S609. Judge whether or not.

Then, when any of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. In step S612, it is determined whether or not the current BB winning is the special first BB winning or the special second BB winning in the specific mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S612 and the current BB winning is the first BB winning or the second BB winning in the normal game mode, 216 is set in the remaining payout counter in step S613, and the remaining payout number is set. A process of displaying 216 on the display unit 61 is performed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S612, 24 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 24 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 in step S614. The numerical value set in step S613 or step S614 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or higher than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state. That is, the upper limit payout number is set as 216 for the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode, and the upper limit payout number is set as 24 in the special first BB and the special first BB in the specific mode, and the upper limit payout of the bonus is set in each mode. The numbers are different.

By performing the processes of steps S610 to S614, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. ..

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioned to in the first BB or the second BB in the normal game mode. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 27, 31 to 49, and "21845" is set as the point value of IV = 28 to 30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium-red 7-matched combination (IV). The probability of winning when = 29 is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning the BAR matching role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1/3.00. Will be. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/65500.

FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. As described above, the first small winning combination prize is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of whether the winning combination is BB medium / small combination 1, BB medium red 7 matching combination, or BB medium BAR matching combination, the first small is irrespective of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Either the winning combination, the 30th minor winning combination, or the 31st minor winning combination is always established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st small winning combination, the 30th small winning combination, and the 31st small winning combination are established. Since the probability of loss in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S615. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Further, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in this game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state is completed, the game state at the time when the CB winning is established is restored. For example, if the CB prize is established under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the end of the CB state, and if the CB prize is established under the third RT state, the third RT state is established after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB, and the special second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, in the case of shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. In the case of shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24-3 × 24) medals in the normal game mode until the BB state ends.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, the CB winning flag, the special 1st BB winning flag, and the special 2nd BB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning , CB winning, special 1st BB winning, special 1st BB winning (when step S609 is NO), a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in step S605, step S613 or step S614. In the case where the end determination process is performed in step S615 and the case where the end determination process is performed, the process proceeds to step S606 and a status command is set. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area. Set the status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the normal gaming mode will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The CB state is not shown.

When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition roll stops on the valid line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third re-game prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (a)). .. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state are not won, so that the 1st RT state does not shift to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, when the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state when the 4th re-gaming prize or the 5th re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 or the 2nd promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23 (b). )reference). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. If the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the 3rd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the 3rd re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped on the valid line. The third replay prize is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (c)). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a lottery table for carry-over (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 16). In the carry-over lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 17), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, in the carry-over lottery table, bonuses and small wins that overlap with bonuses are not won.

In the slot machine 10, in the normal game mode, the main control device 101 manages six types of game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state, and is roughly classified. The main control device 101 manages five types of display modes: a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VBB mode (including an additional special zone), and a BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the mode is changed from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and if you win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, you will shift to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lottery is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the BB mode. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated. When the mode shifts from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VBB mode after the BB mode ends.

The normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay. 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order replay") This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. Transition to challenge mode If the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and if the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning the push order bell and at the time of winning the push order replay, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, as in the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but it is easy to shift to the attack mode. Transition to attack mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. The challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and it almost corresponds to the 1st RT state. .. In the challenge mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified at both the time when the push order bell is won and the time when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, a first attack mode to a fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. Regardless of the attack mode, the attack mode shifts to the VB mode as compared with the normal mode. The transition probability of is high. Transition to VB mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set. , The third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, the stop switch 42 is notified in the operation order notified by the player. When ~ 44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when the game state shifts to the attack mode.

Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. , In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the 4th replay winning or the 5th replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. In that case, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when the game state shifts to the VB mode.

Explaining the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and then return from the attack mode to the normal mode. .. And since the lottery to shift to VB mode is performed in the attack mode, if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and the VB mode returns to the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned. can.

As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also called a so-called chance zone that is expected to shift to the attack mode.

Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, it basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is won, the game shifts to the second attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the game shifts to the third attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery for shifting to the 4th attack mode, you will shift to the 4th attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when shifting to the attack mode, the promotion to the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode is performed, so that the transition probability to the VB mode becomes high and the attack A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the normal game mode, the player has a configuration in which the number of medals owned by the player is increased in each display mode of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are configured to go back and forth by winning a prize in each replay or stopping a transitional outcome. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning prize is established or the transition roll is stopped. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established is notified, so that the number of owned medals can be expected to increase.

Hereinafter, the configuration related to the display mode will be described.

The configuration related to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) processing related to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Processing for lottery results>
The process related to the shift lottery of the display mode (1) is performed in the lottery result correspondence process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, as a result of this lottery, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1 , 2, Chance B duplication 1, 2, Middle bell duplication 1, 2 (see, for example, FIG. 17, IV = 13-18, 31-42, hereinafter, these roles are collectively referred to as "specific role"). Judge whether or not. When the lottery result is a specific combination, the process for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is not won, processing for shifting to the display mode or the like is performed in steps S709 to S712.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the attack mode is not won. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the attack mode is performed. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as an attack mode lottery table in step S803. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the transition probabilities to the attack mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of shifting to the attack mode than the weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to the attack mode is different between the normal time table and the chance mode table as a whole, and the chance mode table has a higher transition probability to the attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to.

After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the process of setting the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode is won as the transition lottery of the display mode, the notification that the transition lottery has been won is notified after passing through the precursor mode. Will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may differ from the game that is notified that the transition lottery has been won. , Set as precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 0 games to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to be different depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode and the game state. This also applies to the lottery process for the number of other precursor games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is subtracted by 1 for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, it is notified that the precursor mode has ended and the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (display mode that shifts after the precursor mode, attack mode in the case of step S810) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursor games. When the bonus winning flag is set, it means that a specific role is won in the carry-over state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and the attack mode transition lottery is won, or a role that overlaps with the bonus (strong cherry duplication 1,). This is the case when the attack mode transition lottery is won in 2nd grade). In this case, the BB mode has priority over the attack mode as the transition destination of the display mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the challenge mode than the weak cherries.

The case where step S811 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case as well, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It is a table of. As in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, the process of setting the challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S814.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first specific combination processing is terminated. The processes of steps S815 to S818 correspond to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S819 to S823. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is an 80% chance of adding 30 games in challenge mode, and a 20% chance of adding 50 games. For weak cherries, there is an 80% chance of adding 5 games, and a 20% chance of adding 20 games.

In step S821, the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S820 is added to the counter (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S822, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information that the addition has occurred, the number of additional games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) to be added. The processing on the display control device 81 side that received the addition command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these addition commands as notification based on the reception of the addition command. Notify.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. In the second RT state, in step S706, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, the second specific combination process is executed in step S707. If a negative determination is made in step S705 or an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the second RT state is performed and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode is performed. Further, in the second specific combination processing, a promotion lottery for the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode is the rank of the current attack mode.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probabilities to the VB mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherries. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is different as a whole, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the 4th attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 3rd attack mode so that the 3rd attack mode has a higher probability of shifting to the VB mode than the 2nd attack mode. It is set so that the transition probability of is high.

In step S903, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, the process for setting the number of precursor games is performed in the same manner as in steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second specific combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, the attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, a table for promotion lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery is not performed when staying in the 4th attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the promotion probability of the second attack mode table is lower than that of the first attack mode table, so that the third attack mode table has a lower promotion probability than the second attack mode table. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank as the rank of attack mode is promoted.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If the promotion is won, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In such a process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one higher than the rank flag. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 receives the promotion command in the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that the effect for the attack mode is performed with the background color according to the rank of the promotion destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, the attack mode additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% chance of winning an additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% chance of winning an additional lottery. The winning probability may be different depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is a 90% chance of adding 20 games in attack mode, and a 10% chance of adding 80 games. For weak cherries, there is a 95% chance of adding 5 games, and a 5% chance of adding 100 games.

In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends when the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is a case where the third RT state is set, or a state where the second RT state is set and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the added command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of this lottery process is not a specific winning combination, the result of this lottery process is pushed in step S709. It is determined whether or not the order replay or the push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") has been won. If the push order combination is won, the push order combination process is performed in step S710, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends. The push order combination processing will be described in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S704, step S707, step S708 and step S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The special zone flag is a flag set based on the establishment of the 7th re-game prize, and the additional special zone is a high addition of the number of continuous games in the attack zone over multiple games. Shows the state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S711, the special zone process is executed in step S712. The special zone flag, the special zone, and the special zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the process for dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

As described above, when it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won in the lottery result handling process, a process for shifting to a challenge mode, an attack mode or a VB mode, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode. And so on. If the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, the notification of winning the transition lottery is given after the precursory game. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the gaming state are performed. And the processing to do is done. Therefore, first, the process related to the notification that the transition lottery has been won will be described.

<Process for mode transition notification>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification processing (step S206) in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a predetermined number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games is counted in the winning result correspondence process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

When the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies that the challenge mode is started by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1106, counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1110, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1114, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1114, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, of the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode that shifts through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and VB mode, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, which is a precursor. Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode accompany the transition of the gaming state, and specifically, the attack mode shifts to the second RT state. It is started and the VB mode is due to the difference that it is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is the case where the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, the 3rd replay winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2. The transition is made when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are established, This is the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay winning or the like. Therefore, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the winning combination is to shift the gaming state thereafter. It is configured to enable the transition of the game state. It should be noted that from the notification that the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery has been won to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state shifts), the notification as a preparation state (for example, "" "Preparing" will be announced.

<Explanation about transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the push order combination process (step S710) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the push order notification unit 68. Here, a case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

In the push order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c provided side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b is lit, and the left and right LED 68a, 68c lamps are lit. Turns off. As a result, the player can recognize that the stop switch to be operated first in this game is the middle stop switch 43. The push order notification unit 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by changing the color of the LED lamp to be turned on. Further, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked so that the stop switch to be operated after the second can be recognized.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 36B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification unit 68, the LED lamp 68b in the middle is turned off and the LED lamp 68c on the right is turned on (the LED lamp 68a on the left remains turned off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification effect, the push order is during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. The notification effect is set to be executed. In this way, by configuring the push order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the stop switches 42 to 42 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation of 44 desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the push order combination process executed in step S710 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first re-game or the third re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as the flag for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode (VB mode, additional special zone), the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, in step S1203, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes not only the case of being in the attack mode but also the case of being in the VB mode or being in the special zone.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the attack mode is not in progress, the process for notifying the push order of the third re-game is executed in step S1204. Specifically, among the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (a)). After that, in step S1205, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order combination process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the attack mode is in progress, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified in step S1206 (see FIG. 23A). After that, in step S1207, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1203 is the case where the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won even though the attack mode is in progress. For example, the gaming state is changed to the first RT state during the attack mode. It is assumed that you have fallen. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. Therefore, the case of making a negative determination in step S1203 indicates that the attack mode is in progress and the first RT state is in effect.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, so that the game state is reached. Can be transferred to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

As already explained, the attack notification flag is based on the fact that the lottery for transition to attack mode was won and the number of precursor games became 0 (notification that the lottery for transition to attack mode was won). Is a flag that is set. Further, the attack mode flag is a flag set based on the transition to the attack mode (shift to the second RT state). The attack notification flag and the attack mode flag are cleared when the attack mode ends. Therefore, when the attack notification flag is set and the attack mode flag is not set, it indicates that the preparation state for transition to the attack mode is set, and the attack notification flag is set. And, when the attack mode flag is set, it means that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, it may be configured to clear the attack notification flag and set the attack mode flag based on the transition to the attack mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1208 whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1208 is the case where the first re-game or the second re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1209, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, the push order notification process of the first re-game is executed in step S1206. Specifically, among the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1207, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

In this way, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in the situation where the attack notification flag is set, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified, so that the game state is set to the first RT state. It is possible to prevent the transition to. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1209, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the second RT state, when the attack mode ends, the attack mode flag and the attack notification flag are cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second fall replay 1 to 3 is won. The re-game winning may be established, and the RT state shifts to the first RT state.

Further, for example, in the 1st RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even if it is done (even if it shifts to the 2nd RT state), the 2nd replay winning can be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will promptly shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1208, it is determined in step S1210 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1210 is a case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game, or the fifth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

When the VB notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1213. Specifically, among the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1214, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1211, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1212, the process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed in step S1206, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1207, and then the process is performed. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the player must be in the attack mode. If there is no push order notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, it is determined in step S1215 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1215 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins, depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1217 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1218, the process for notifying the push order of the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game is executed. Specifically, among the 1st re-game, the 3rd re-game, and the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game, the operation order corresponding to the 6th re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning is notified (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23). c) See). After that, in step S1219, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1216, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1217, the process for notifying the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1206, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1207, and then the process is performed. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the push order is performed if the attack mode is not in progress. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, it is determined in step S1220 whether or not the lottery result this time is a push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, in step S1221, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the normal mode or the challenge mode. In this case, the flag indicating the display mode is grasped, and if none of the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the BB mode flag is set, it is determined that the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. When the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1222 (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1223, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1220 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1221, the main push order combination processing is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process.

<Process to shift the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shifting of the gaming state wins will be described. This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the process of dealing with the winning result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1301, the game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode described above, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established based on the stop result this time. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs a process for shifting the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the attack mode flag is set. When the attack mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies that the attack mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1307, counting of the number of continuous attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1307 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established. As described above, when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings have been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the 3rd RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the VB mode flag is not set, the process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, the process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode, and after the VB mode ends, the VB mode always shifts to the attack mode.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies that the VB mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1313 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the 4th and 5th replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established. In the present embodiment, when the 7th re-game winning is established, that is, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the BAR symbol stops on the combination line in the middle row, it is configured to move to the additional special zone. In the additional special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added not only to the specific role but also to all the roles (pushing order role, specific role and bonus) that can be won in the normal game mode. The case where the 7th re-game prize is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game prize (FIG. 23). (C)) Further, it is a case where the 7th re-game of the 1st, 6th, and 7th re-games wins a prize, for example, 20 minutes when the BAR replay 1 is won. Win a lottery to win the 7th re-game with a probability of 1.

When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a process of setting the special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the above-mentioned additional special zone, and when the special zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. .. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and after the special zone ends, it always shifts to the VB mode.

After that, in step S1317, the special zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies that the special zone is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1318, the counting of the number of continuous special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1318 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

As described above, based on the winning of the winning combination (third to fifth replay) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent the attack mode etc. from being started based on the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the game state by chance even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won. Is.

In addition, when shifting to the display mode, among those that accompany the transition to the gaming state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or when shifting from attack mode to VB mode, Or, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition to the display mode is not performed when the gaming state shifts due to, for example, the second re-game winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Based on the above, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the bet number is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the game mode, a normal game mode performed in the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game and a specific mode performed in the 1-bet game are provided. The process of step S1401 is for determining whether the game to be ended this time is a game in the normal game mode or a game in the specific mode. Then, in step S1401, when the number of bets is 1 as a specific number, it is determined that the game to be ended this time is a game in the specific mode. If the game is in a specific mode, the game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, in the game in the specific mode, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the like are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a game in the normal game mode instead of the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process is terminated. .. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the like are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode is performed, the push order notification for shifting the game state is performed by these flags, and it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (when the precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. ..

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407 and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of challenge mode continuation games is subtracted. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and the challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode ends in this game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. In the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412 and the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, so that the number of attack mode continuation games is decremented. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. After that, in step S1416, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1418, and it is determined whether or not the zone is an additional special zone. If it is not an additional special zone, the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1419. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. After that, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of special zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and the special zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1427. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in this game. As such notification, for example, the number of games that have been successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End judgment processing>
Next, as the process at the end of the bonus, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As described above, the end determination process is the process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success or failure of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is terminated, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus and the duplicate are won are performed. Processing for adding the number of games such as.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination is established. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB small and medium small winning combination 1) is established with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 28). Further, when the player wins in the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV = 29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further. If the 30th small winning combination of the 1st small winning combination and the 30th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 30th small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of winning the BB middle red 7 matching combination, the lottery for winning the 30th small combination is won with a probability of 1/100. When the BAR matching combination (IV = 30) in BB is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further, the 1st small combination. If the 31st small winning combination of the winning combination and the 31st small winning combination wins the lottery, the 31st small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of winning the BAR matching combination in BB, the lottery for winning the 31st small combination is won with a probability of 1/200.

If it is determined in step S1501 that the small winning combination is established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the process of step S1502 is executed, the addition process is executed in step S1503. The addition process is a process for granting benefits other than payout of the game medium based on the result of the game during the bonus this time. For example, if the result of this game is the 30th small winning combination (7 reds in the lower row), if the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode is won, and the mode is other than the normal mode or the challenge mode. If there is, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, when the 31st small winning combination (lower BAR alignment) is established, if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, the attack mode and VB mode are won, and if the display mode is attack mode, the VB mode and special zone. In the VB mode, the special zone is won multiple times (for example, twice), and in the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 300 games). In step S1503, a flag (attack mode winning flag, etc.) corresponding to the transition of the display mode is set, and a counter addition process (addition process such as an attack mode continuation counter) is performed according to the number of additional games.

In the following step S1504, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after setting the bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1505, in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding the number of continuous games.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1507, the number of precursor games is set in step S1508, and the precursor command is set in step S1509. The processing of steps S1507 to S1509 is the same as the processing of steps S808 to S810. After executing the process of step S1509, the end determination process is terminated.

That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus ends, the attack mode winning notification is performed via the precursor game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will shift to an advantageous state again.

Here, if the bonus is won during any of the precursor modes before the winning notification, the precursor games are already set when the lottery process for the precursor games is performed in step S1507. In the present embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. That is, regardless of the number of remaining games, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the bonus is set again after the bonus ends. By doing this, it is possible to make the feeling of excitement after the bonus ends for a long time.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. When the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the winning notification of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. When the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1513, the attack mode game number addition process is performed in step S1514, and the addition command is set in step S1515. .. The processing of steps S1513 to S1515 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1515, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. When the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, the challenge mode game number addition process is performed in step S1518, and the addition command is set in step S1519. .. The processing of steps S1517 to S1519 is the same as the processing of steps S820 to S822. When a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after the process of step S1519 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zones>
Next, the processing for the special zone will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The special zone processing is the processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 31). As already explained, the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped in step S1601. In the following step S1602, the attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1603, the number of games in the attack mode is added. Then, in step S1604, after setting the addition command, the processing for the special zone is terminated. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 is larger than that in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effect on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As various notification processes, an effect setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1702, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a mode transition notification process (FIG. 6) in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like in 35). In the case of these bet-time commands, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the first to third commands are used. There are precursor commands and addition commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order combination processing (FIG. 37), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a stop command. The stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and is a winning result command set in step S415 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, and special zone set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 38). There is an end command etc. In the case of these stop commands, the stop effect setting process is executed in step S1708.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1709, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1709, it is based on an effect based on a command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, at the start, and at the stop (for example, an effect when the first reel is stopped, an effect when the second reel is stopped, and an operation of the settlement switch 59. Settings for staging, etc.), staging settings based on signals from sensors (first staging switch detection sensor, second staging switch detection sensor, etc.) connected without going through the main control device 101, settings for error notification, etc. I do.

Hereinafter, the bet-time effect setting process, the start-time effect setting process, and the stop-time effect setting process will be described. In the description of each effect setting process, the outline of the display effect of FIGS. 50 to 55 will be referred to.

<Bet production setting process>
The bet-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the bet command received this time is a bet command, and the information on the number of bets included in the bet command is a specific number bet command which is a specific number (1). Such a process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be executed is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when it is determined that the game mode is a specific number bet command, the game mode executed this time is the specific mode. Means that. In this case, the effect setting process for the specific mode is executed in step S1802, and then the effect setting process is terminated. The bet-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the command is not a specific number bet command and the game mode to be executed is the normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, the process of setting the challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1804. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the character "Challenge mode start" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display suggesting that the mode is a chance mode (for example, a predetermined character display) is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "grab the attack mode!" With a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1808. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "VICTORYBONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing any of the processes of step S1804, step S1806, and step S1808, or when a negative determination is made in step S1807, other bet-time effects are set in step S1809, and then this effect setting process is performed. To finish. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode that shifts to one condition that the game has not been performed for a predetermined time, or turning on the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Starting staging setting process>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the number of bets at the start is the specific number (1). Such a process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be started is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when it is determined that the number of bets is a specific number, the game mode executed this time is the specific mode. It means that there is. In this case, the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode is executed in step S1902, and then the effect setting process ends. The start-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the number is not a specific number, the display mode setting process is performed in step S1902. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VB mode, or a specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. , The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are set as the flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, the challenge mode flag is set in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S1804. In step S1903, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

In the following step S1904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, the push order notification process is performed in step S1905. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. In the case of not in the attack mode, in step S2004, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the third replay winning is established, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S2003 that the attack mode is in progress, in step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform push order notification in which the first re-game winning is established, and then for push order notification. End the process.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first replay winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2008 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1808, a notification flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The notified flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2008, it is preferable to configure the configuration to determine the presence / absence of the notified flag. If the winning notification of the VB mode has been completed, in step S2009, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the 4th and 5th replay winnings are established, and then the push order notification is performed. End the processing. If the winning notification in the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2007 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2011, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. When in the VB mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the 6th to 8th replay winnings are established in step S2012, and then the push order notification process is terminated. do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2010 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the lottery result this time is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2014, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the bell winning is established as the first small winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2013, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1904 that the push order combination is not won, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the specific combination is won. If the specific combination is won, the specific combination notification process is performed in step S1907. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, or after the process of step S1905 or step S1907 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1908. In step S1908, it is determined whether or not an additional command is received as the command at the start of this time. When the additional command is received, in step S1909, the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is set in advance so that the additional effect is executed at the time of stopping. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. The display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 may be different depending on the number of additional games. The additional effect may be set as the start effect.

When the addition command is not received in step S1908, or after the process of step S1909 is executed, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1910, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S1911, and then the continuous effect setting process is executed. In step S1912, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. The bonus notification process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S1912, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is accepted is performed.

<Stopping effect setting process>
Next, the stop-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the number of bets of the game ending this time is the specific number (1). Such a process is a process for determining whether the game mode of the current game is the normal game mode or the specific mode, and when it is determined that the number of bets is a specific number, the game mode of the current game is the specific mode. It means that it was. In this case, the effect setting process for the specific mode is executed in step S2102, and then the effect setting process is terminated. The stop-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the number is not a specific number, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. When the challenge mode end command is included, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2104. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the character display of "challenge mode end" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, the sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Make more devotion!" With a male's thick voice) is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode start command is included, the process of setting the attack mode start effect is performed in step S2106. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the character display of "attack mode !! Ver.1" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" With a high voice of a woman).

By the way, the display of "Ver.1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "attack mode !! Ver.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.4" are displayed. The display is done.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the attack mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode end command is included, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2108. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the character "attack mode END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (VB mode, special zone is included). ) Is displayed, and the total number of payouts in this attack mode (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you" in the high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode start command is included, the process of setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2110. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 53A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "777 VICTORY !!". In addition, in the VB mode start effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" by the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2109, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode end command is included, the process of setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2112. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the character "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of this VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "it will continue" in the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2111, it is determined in step S2113 whether or not the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, the process of setting the special zone start effect is performed in step S2114. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Additional challenge !!" and a special mode in which the attack mode is likely to be added. The character suggesting that is is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "go" by the voice of a boy) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2113, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the special zone end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone end command is included, the process of setting the special zone end effect is performed in step S2116. In the special zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. It is advisable to make the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 different according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2115, it is determined in step S2117 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the bonus end command is included, the process of setting the bonus end effect is performed in step S2118. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during this bonus, and if the bonus has moved to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode (attack mode). Display the total number of payouts (including VB mode, special zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end production, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes of step S2104, step S2106, step S2108, step S2110, step S2112, step S2114, step S2116 and step S2118, or after making a negative determination in step S2117, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1909 in the start effect setting process.

After that, in step S2120, other stop-time effects are set, and then the effect setting process ends. In step S2120, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to be lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of these display modes, various in-game staging processes are performed.

<Processing for directing during various games>
In the present embodiment, as the effects during various games, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided. The continuous production is a production that expects a favorable result for the player (winning a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game of multiple times (4 times in this embodiment). It is a production that can be continued over a period of time, and is a production in which notification of whether or not the advantageous result was achieved in the final game is performed. The bonus medium effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB, or the special second BB prize.

The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). Shows a daruma-dropping effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the first stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully dropped. It shows that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage daruma drop fails). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of continuation of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the second stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times of the remaining continuous effect is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the third stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

As shown in FIG. 55 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous production, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, the one-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect of whether or not the result is advantageous for the player is performed (the figure shows an effect that the final stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed).

As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games are there until the end of the continuous production).

Here, in each game of continuous production, whether or not the continuous production is continued until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, the possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effect is notified is the highest, and the possibility that the discontinuation is notified decreases as the game progresses. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player differs greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production of the current game, and the higher the interest is, as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. ..

The setting of the continuous effect is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1907), the bonus notification process (step S1910), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1911) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be described below in order.

<Process for bonus notification>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. In the case of a bonus winning game, in step S2202, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In the notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning is notified is determined by lottery. Specifically, 1 notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 10 games. In the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination (whether or not the winning combination is duplicated, and if the notification game is duplicated, the type of the duplicated small combination, etc.). For example, if the bonus is won by overlapping strong cherries, a small number of games may be easily selected, and if the bonus is won by overlapping weak cherries, a large number of games may be easily selected.

In the following step S2203, a process of setting the number of continuous production games is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2202. Specifically, in step S2203, the continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which continuous production of four games is performed, continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, when it is decided in step S2202 that the bonus winning is notified after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4. If it is decided in step S2202 that the bonus winning is notified after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. Even in this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4.

If less than 4 notification games are set in step S2202, the continuous production is started from the middle. For example, if it is decided in step S2202 that the bonus winning is notified after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous production starts from this game, and is performed from the production of the third continuous production game of FIG. 55 (c).

After executing the process of step S2203, in step S2204, the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after the process of step S2204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from this game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB or the special second BB is won to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2205 is the case where the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB, or the special second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2206, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus medium effect counter of various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus middle effect counter is a counter for executing the effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the bonus games of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the winning combination in which 9 medals are paid out in each game is won, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. That is, the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB end in 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus medium effect counter is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games should be produced. Is. Then, in step S2206, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and the subtraction process of the bonus effect counter is performed in each game of the bonus game. After the processing of step S2206 is performed, in step S2207, the bonus middle effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The bonus during effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the bonus during effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or after the process of step S2207 is executed, the bonus notification process is terminated.

<Process for notifying specific role>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command of this time. If the precursor command is not included, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the additional command is included as the start command of this time. If the addition command is not included, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a result of the lottery, you have not won the lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or the lottery to add the number of continuous games. If the bonus is not won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2304. Although it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-precursor mode from the precursor mode in appearance, in the precursor mode, the player is notified of a favorable result (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player a favorable result based on the end of the pseudo-precursor game number.

In step S2304, a table for pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of ROM 182, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 183b, and a lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo precursor mode is performed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo precursor mode lottery is set to be different depending on the type of the specific winning combination. For example, the strong cherry is more pseudo than the weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the precursor mode is high.

In step S2305, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2304. If the game is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2306. This process corresponds to step S808 or the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 out of 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2307, a process of setting the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2306 in the continuous effect counter is performed. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous production. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2307, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous effect (remaining 4 games), continuous effect is started. It will be.

In step S2308, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo precursor mode is set is executed in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2309, the continuous effect flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2301 to S2303, or if a negative determination is made in step S2305, the specific combination notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous staging setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1911 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 43) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. When the precursor command is included, in step S2402, the process of inputting the precursor game number of the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter is performed. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (4 games remaining), continuous production is started. In the following step S2403, the continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2403 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2408, and the effect table for this precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2409, the corresponding directing effect data is specified from the precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Performs the process of setting as a continuous effect of. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for this precursor, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, it is the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is the production data indicating that the continuous production of this time ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2411, the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Performs the process of setting as a continuous effect of. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game or the effect data indicating that the continuous effect does not continue is used. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect this time ends with a failure.

The effect data specified from the pseudo-precursor effect table when the continuous effect counters are 1 to 3 include those for which continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counters are 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game of FIG. 55 (a). When the staging data of the first staging game is set and the continuous staging counter is 0, the staging data of the second staging game indicating that the staging is not continued until the next game is set in FIG. 55 (b). By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of the game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S2409 or step S2411, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2413. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2406 or step S2412, or after the process of step S2413 is performed, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, it is determined whether or not the bonusing effect flag is set. If it is set, the subtraction process of the bonus middle effect counter is performed in step S2415. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during the bonus is performed. In the following step S2416, a bonus effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2417, the corresponding effect data of the bonus medium effect is specified from the bonus effect table and the bonus medium effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b. Performs the process of setting as an effect during the bonus. In step S2418, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during the bonus is 0. If the bonus effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the bonus effect flag is performed in step S2419. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main control device 101 side is performed based on the insertion of the medal as the game medium and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the rotation is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. Whether or not the corresponding replay is won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell winning and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the notification of the operation order is performed, the push is performed in the RT state with the replay probability improved. It is possible to win a prize in the order bell, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

In the above-mentioned flow of games, for example, for a player who is not accustomed to the game, it is difficult to understand how the game state transition and the display mode transition are performed. You may not be able to enjoy it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a specific mode is provided in which the above-mentioned flow of games can be experienced.

<Overview of specific mode>
The specific mode is set as a 1-bet game, as opposed to the normal game mode set as a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game. In the specific mode, it is possible to experience the playability of the normal game mode in a simulated manner without reducing the number of medals. Specifically, one game is started by inserting one medal and one card is used for each game. Is paid out, and the mode is such that there is no increase or decrease in medals. In other words, the specific mode is a mode in which all the game results are paid out equal to the number of bets. Then, it is possible to experience the transition of the gaming state (transition of the RT state) and the transition of the display mode in the above-mentioned normal game mode by each game result of equal payout. The mechanism of the specific mode will be described below.

As described above, in the 3-bet game, the downward-sloping line L4, which is a straight line, is regarded as an effective line (FIG. 8 (a)), while in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is regarded as an effective line (FIG. 8 (c)). )). In the specific mode implemented as a 1-bet game, the combination of the winning symbols is different from the normal game mode mainly implemented as a 3-bet game.

More specifically, when the lottery result in the 1-bet game is a predetermined result and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line, it is not an effective line in the 1-bet game and falls to the right. A specific symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on the line L4. The specific symbol combination is set as a combination in which a prize of the specific result is established when the lottery result in the 3-bet game is the specific result. That is, when the predetermined symbol combination for which the winning of the predetermined result is established in the 1-bet game stops at the bending line L6, the specific symbol combination for which the winning of the specific result is established in the 3-bet game descends to the right. It will stop at line L4, and although the same symbol is apparently stopped at the same place in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game, a specific result will be won in the 3-bet game, and in the 1-bet game. The result is a predetermined result, and the result of winning is different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1), in the 3-bet game, the first BB is won, and the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped on the valid line. The first BB prize is established. In the 1-bet game, a special 1st BB (1st PBB) is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 1st BB, and when the special 1st BB is won, the "red 7" symbol and "red" are on the valid line. The combination of symbols is set so that the special first BB prize is established when the "7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol are stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1), when the combination of the symbols that are the special 1st BB winning symbols stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line which is regarded as the effective line in the 3-bet game. At L4, the combination of symbols that will be the first BB prize is stopped. However, in the 1-bet game, the right-down line L4 is not an effective line, so even if the combination of symbols that will be the first BB prize stops at the right-down line L4 as described above, the first BB prize is not established.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2), in the 3-bet game, the 26th small role (watermelon) is won, and the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol stop on the valid line. Then, the 26th small role prize is established. In the 1-bet game, the 26P small winning combination is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 26th small winning combination, and when the 26P small winning combination is won, the "watermelon" symbol and "watermelon" are on the valid line. The combination of symbols is set so that the 26th P small winning combination is established when the symbol and the "red bell" symbol are stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), when the combination of the symbols that will win the 26th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, the downward movement is regarded as the effective line in the 3-bet game. The combination of symbols that will be the 26th small winning combination is stopped on the line L4. However, in the 1-bet game, the right-down line L4 is not an effective line, so even if the combination of symbols that will be the 26th small winning combination is stopped at the right-down line L4 as described above, the 26th small winning combination is not established. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3), in the 3-bet game, the second small winning combination (bell) is won, and the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are on the valid line. By stopping, the second small winning combination is established. In the 1-bet game, a 2P small winning combination is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 2nd small winning combination, and when the 2P small winning combination is won, a "white bell" symbol and "red" are placed on the valid line. The combination of symbols is set so that the second P small winning combination is established when the "7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol are stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (b3), when the combination of the symbols for the second P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, the downward movement is regarded as the effective line in the 3-bet game. The combination of the symbols that will be the second small winning combination is stopped on the line L4. However, in the 1-bet game, the right-down line L4 is not an effective line, so even if the combination of symbols that will be the second small winning combination is stopped at the right-down line L4 as described above, the second small winning combination is not established. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4), in the 3-bet game, the second small winning combination (bell) is won, and the "white bell", "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol stop on the valid line. As a result, the second small winning combination is not established and the so-called bell is missed. This combination of symbols is a transitional roll. In the 1-bet game, if the 2nd P small winning combination is won, the 2P small winning combination is established by stopping the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red bell" symbol on the valid line. Without doing so, it becomes a so-called missing bell. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (b4), when the combination of the symbols that is the so-called missing bell instead of the second P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, the 3-bet game On the downward-sloping line L4, which is regarded as an effective line in the above, the combination of symbols (transitional roll) that is a so-called missed bell without winning the second small winning combination is stopped.

As described above, in the specific mode, a winning combination different from the winning combination in the 3-bet game is established with the same outcome as the winning outcome in the 3-bet game as the normal game mode.

Here, in the 3-bet game in the normal game mode, the right-down line L4, which is a straight line, is set as an effective line, while in the specific mode, the bending line L6, which is a line where bending occurs, is set as an effective line. .. Then, it is considered that it is easier for the player to notice when the combination of symbols that wins the prize is stopped at the straight line rather than at the line where the bending occurs. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1). , Even if the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol, which is the first PBB prize, stops at the bent line L6, which is the effective line, to the right of the combination of the symbols. It is considered that the eyes go first toward the "Red 7" symbol that is stopped along the descending line L4. Moreover, the stop roll in which the "Red 7" symbol is aligned with the downward-sloping line L4 and stops is a stop roll in which the first BB prize is established in the normal game mode.

Then, from the player who is familiar with the stop roll, even if the combination of the first PBB winning symbols stopped at the bending line L6 is stopped in the specific mode, it is not set as an effective line and goes down to the right. It is considered that it can be judged that the first BB prize has been established by being distracted by the combination of the symbols of the first BB prize stopped at the line L4. That is, with such a setting of the outcome, when the first PBB winning is established in the specific mode, it can be made to think that the first BB winning is established instead of the first PBB winning.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), the combination of the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "red bell" symbol is stopped on the bent line L6, which is an effective line, in the specific mode. , It is easier to catch the eye if the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4, which is not an effective line in the specific mode, and if the 26P small winning combination is established in the specific mode, the 26P small It is possible to make people think that the 26th small role prize has been established instead of the role prize.

In addition, the player is not set as a combination of symbols in which different symbols are combined to win a prize, but is set as a combination of symbols in which the same type of symbols are aligned to win a prize. Is considered to be easy to notice. In that respect, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3), even in the normal game mode, the combination of the symbols for which the second small winning combination is established is the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the effective line. Although it is set as a combination of "Red 7" symbols, at the stop roll, the same type of "bell" symbols ("white bell" symbols, "red bell" symbols) are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Then, when the second small winning combination is established, it is considered that the bell role is winning as the second small winning combination due to the symbol stopped at the upper line L1 above the right-down line L4 which is the effective line. Will be. Even in the specific mode, the combination of the symbols for which the second P small winning combination is established is set as a combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol on the effective line, but the winning is In the stop roll that is established, the same type of "bell" symbol is aligned and stopped on the upper line L1 as in the case of the second small winning combination. Then, when the second P small winning combination is established, it is considered that the bell role is determined to have won.

That is, in the present embodiment, the bent line is more easily recognized by the player than the straight line, and the winning mode in which the same type of symbols are aligned is more easily recognized by the player than the winning mode in which different symbols are combined. Is used to make the stop roll in the specific mode be judged as if it were a stop roll in the normal game mode, and the pseudo game can be reproduced as a more realistic one.

Further, the bending line L6 set as an effective line in the specific mode and the right-down line L4 set as an effective line in the normal game mode have a common symbol stop position (left reel) in the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. The upper stage of 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M) are set, and different symbol stop positions (lower stage and middle stage of the right reel 32R) are set in the right reel 32R. In this way, when associating the winning combination in the specific mode and the normal game mode and the winning mode thereof, only the stop symbol of the right reel 32R needs to be different. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily associate the winning modes between the specific mode and the normal game mode.

Further, the effective line in the specific mode and the effective line in the normal game mode are set so that the lines L1 to L6 do not overlap. This is because if the overlapping valid lines are set, if the combination of winning symbols is stopped in the overlapping valid lines, the stop result will be different between the specific mode and the normal game mode. This is because, despite the fact that the stop rolls are standardized as described above, it is clearly understood that different roles are played by winning a prize with different stop rolls.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won in the specific mode and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described.

As a combination corresponding to the first small combination to the 32nd small combination in the normal game mode, the first P small combination to the 32nd small combination are set in the specific mode.

In the specific mode, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay symbol" on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the first P small winning combination will be won. If the 1st P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out. The 1st P small winning combination corresponds to the 1st small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will be the 1st P small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. On line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the lower row of the right reel 32R. The symbol stops. That is, the "bell" symbol stops at the downward-sloping line L4.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "BAR" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol and the player stop on the bent line L6, which is an effective line, the 2nd P small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination will be awarded. When the 2nd P small winning combination prize to the 17th P small winning combination winning is established, one medal is paid out. The 2nd P small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination correspond to the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and the above 2P small winning combination winning to the first bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols that will win the 17P small winning combination is stopped, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row of the left reel 32L on the right-down line L4, and the "red" symbol is stopped on the middle row of the middle reel 32M. The "bell" symbol stops, and the "red bell" symbol stops at the bottom of the right reel 32R. That is, the "bell" symbol stops at the upper line L1.

Of the 2nd P small role to the 17th P small role, the 2nd P small role, the 3rd P small role, the 6th P small role and the 7P small role have the same outcome, and the 4th P small role, the 5P small role, The 8th P small role and the 9th P small role have the same roll, the 10th P small role, the 11P small role, the 14P small role and the 15P small role have the same roll, and the 12P small role and the 13P small role have the same result. The combination, the 16th P small role and the 17th P small role have the same result. That is, the roles of these same outcomes are the same in the specific mode. However, in the following description, they will be described as different roles for comparison with the normal game mode.

The 18th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. If the 18th small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the one-bet game. The 18P small combination corresponds to the 18th small combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 18P small combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of the symbols of the 18th small winning combination is stopped on the line L4.

The "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the valid line, the 19th P small winning combination will be won. If the 19th P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 19th small winning combination corresponds to the 19th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 19th small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of the symbols of the 19th small winning combination is stopped on the line L4.

The 20th small role to the 24th small role correspond to the 20th small role to the 24th small role in the normal game mode, and when the 20P small role winning to the 24P small role winning are established, the 1-bet game. Then one medal will be paid out. The 20th P small winning combination and the 21st P small winning combination, and the 22nd P small winning combination and the 23rd P small winning combination are the same combination, and are treated as the same combination. However, for comparison with the normal game mode, each will be described as a different role.

Similar to the 18P small winning combination, the 25th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. In the case of the 18th P small winning combination, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle row only when the special 1st BB or the special 2nd BB PBB is won in duplicate. If the gain (combination of "2nd replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol) is the 25th P small winning combination, the right reel 32R regardless of whether or not the PBB is won. The "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol may stop in the middle row. If the 25th P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 25th small winning combination corresponds to the 25th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 25th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 25th small winning combination is stopped.

When the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line. Will be the 26th P small role prize. If the 26th P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 26th small winning combination corresponds to the 26th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the above-mentioned 26P small winning combination winning symbols stops at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of the symbols of the 26th small winning combination is stopped on the line L4.

The 27P small winning combination is a winning mode in which the so-called watermelon tempai is out of order, and when the 27P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. The 27P small winning combination corresponds to the 27th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 27P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 27th small winning combination is stopped.

Left reel 32L "red bell" or "white bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol, right When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the reel 32R stops on the bending line L6 which is the effective line, the 28P small winning combination is won. The 28th P small role winning is a stop roll that is out of the so-called double tempai. If the 28th small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 28P small winning combination corresponds to the 28th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 28P small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 28th small winning combination is stopped.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the 29th P small role It will be a prize. If the 29th P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 29th small winning combination corresponds to the 29th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 29th small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of the symbols of the 29th small winning combination is stopped on the line L4.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stopped on the bent line L6, which is an effective line. In that case, the 30th P small winning combination will be won. If the 30th P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 30th small winning combination corresponds to the 30th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 30th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of the symbols of the 30th small winning combination is stopped on the line L4.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective lines. If it stops on the bend line L6, it will be the 31st P small winning combination. If the 31st P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 31st small winning combination corresponds to the 31st small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will be the 31st small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of the symbols of the 31st small winning combination is stopped on the line L4.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line. Will be the 32nd P small role prize. If the 32nd P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 32nd small winning combination corresponds to the 32nd small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the above-mentioned 32P small winning combination winning symbols stops at the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode, it descends to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 32nd small winning combination is stopped.

As with the 30th to 32nd small winning combinations, the 30th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination can be won during the bonus.

As already explained, in the normal game mode, the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are given as the prizes that the privilege of the re-game that can play the next game without inserting a medal is given. It is set. On the other hand, as the re-game in the specific mode, a special re-game prize is set corresponding to the first re-game prize. Then, in the specific mode, the prize corresponding to the 2nd re-game prize to the 8th re-game prize is not the re-game, but the second lip small role as a small role in which one medal is paid out when the prize is established. Winning to 8th Lip Small role winning is set.

That is, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "second replay" symbol stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, a special replay prize will be awarded. If the special re-game prize is established, the next game can be played as a re-game without inserting a medal. The special re-game corresponds to the first re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the special re-game prize is given to the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode. When the combination is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the first replay winning symbol is stopped at the right-down line L4. In this case, the combination of the "replay" symbols is stopped on the middle line L2.

The effective lines are the "BAR" or "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. If it stops on the bend line L6, it will be the second lip small winning combination. If the second lip small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the one-bet game. The second rip small combination corresponds to the second re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the above-mentioned second rip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of the symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the second replay winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4. In this case, the combination of the "replay" symbols stops at the upward-sloping line L5.

The "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "2nd replay" symbol stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the 3rd reel small winning combination will be won. If the third lip small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the one-bet game. The third lip small combination corresponds to the third re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the above-mentioned third lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of the symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the third re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

The fourth lip small combination corresponds to the fourth replay in the normal game mode. When the 4th lip small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 60 (d) to 60 (g), when the combination of the symbols that will be the 4th lip small winning combination is stopped at the bent line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, the right-down line L4 , The combination of the symbols of the 4th replay winning symbol is stopped.

The "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an effective line. Or, the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are the effective lines. If it stops on the line L6, it will be the 5th Lip small winning combination. If the 5th lip small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The fifth lip small combination corresponds to the fifth re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIGS. 60 (h) and 61 (a), the bending line L6, which is an effective line of the specific mode, is described above. When the combination of the symbols for the 5th lip small winning combination is stopped, the combination of the symbols for the 5th replay winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

The "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol, "youth" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol or the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the 6th lip small winning combination will be won. If the 6th Lip Small Role Winning is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The sixth lip small combination corresponds to the sixth re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the above-mentioned sixth lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of the symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the sixth replay winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

When the "1st replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line. Will be the 7th Lip Small Role Winner. If the 7th Lip Small Role Winning is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 7th lip small combination corresponds to the 7th re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the 7th lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the 7th re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

If the "1st replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the first 8 rip small role prize. If the 8th Lip Small Role Winning is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The eighth lip small combination corresponds to the eighth re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the above-mentioned third lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of the symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the third re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

Corresponding to the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize, and the CB prize in the normal game mode, the 1st PBB prize (special 1st BB prize), the 2nd PBB prize (special 2nd BB prize), and the PCB prize (special CB prize) in the specific mode. Winning, SB winning) is provided.

The 1st PBB prize corresponds to the 1st BB prize, and as described above, the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the first PBB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the special bonus state as the bonus is established. Further, when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is an effective line, or on the left. If the "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the second PBB. As a prize is awarded and the bonus is established, the gaming state shifts to the special bonus state. The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line. If this is the case, the PCB will be won and the gaming state will shift to the special CB state as a bonus. In this embodiment, the PCB is set not to be won, and the PCB winning is not established.

A special transition roll is set in the specific mode as a stop roll corresponding to the transition roll in the normal game mode. The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol stops on the bent line L6 as an effective line, or the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" on the middle reel 32M. If the symbol or the "first replay" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bend line L6, it is considered as a special transition. When the special transition roll is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 61 (e) and 61 (f), when the combination of the symbols that are the special transition roll is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode. , The combination of the symbols of the transition roll is stopped at the right-down line L4.

In addition, in the specific mode, the first lip small combination and the out-of-small combination are provided as the combination that does not correspond to the combination in the normal game mode.

The "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" or "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops on a certain bend line L6, it will be the first lip small winning combination. If the first lip small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the one-bet game. As shown in FIG. 61 (g), when the combination of the symbols that are the first lip small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, basically, the upper line L1 is marked with "the first". The "1 replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is aligned and stopped.

The bending line L6 where the "first replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the right reel 32R are effective lines. If it stops at the top, it will be a small win. If a small winning combination is won, one medal will be paid out in the one-bet game. As shown in FIG. 61 (h), when the combination of the symbols that are the above-mentioned out-of-order small winning combination is stopped at the bent line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, all the symbols are aligned in the straight lines L1 to L5. It doesn't stop, and it becomes a disjointed eye.

The lottery table in the specific mode will be described with reference to FIG. 62. Here, in the specific mode, each RT state is not set as a game state as in the normal game mode, but a normal game state and a bonus state (special bonus state) are set. The lottery table of FIG. 62 is a lottery table referred to during the normal gaming state in the specific mode.

Incidentally, even when the game of the specific mode is performed during each RT state in the normal game mode, the lottery table for the normal game state in the specific mode can be referred to. Further, when the game of the normal game mode is performed during the normal game state in the specific mode, the lottery table for each RT state in the normal game mode can be referred to.

In the lottery table for the specific mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for each of the index values IV = 1 to 49, and the winning flag is not set at the index values IV = 1 to 49 (affirmative determination in step S305). do not do). In the figure, the index values IV = 1 to 49 are omitted.

At the index value IV = 50, a small winning combination and a first small winning combination are set. The index value IV = 51 corresponds to the normal replay (IV = 1) in the normal game mode, and a special replay is set as the winning combination. The index values IV = 52 to 55 correspond to the first promotion replays 1 to 4 (IV = 2 to 5) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special first promotion replays 1 to 4. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small role, the 3rd lip small role, the 6th lip small role to the 8th lip small role, and the out-of-order small role are set. The index values IV = 56 to 58 correspond to the fall replays 1 to 3 (IV = 6 to 8) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special fall replays 1 to 3. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small role, the 2nd lip small role, the 6th lip small role to the 7th lip small role, and the out-of-order small role are set. The index values IV = 59,60 correspond to the second promotion replays 1 and 2 (IV = 9, 10) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special second promotion replays 1 and 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small role, the 4th lip small role, and the 5th lip small role, an out-of-order small role is set. The index values IV = 61, 62 correspond to BAR replays 1 and 2 (IV = 11, 12) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special BAR replays 1 and 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small role, the 3rd lip small role, the 6th lip small role to the 8th lip small role, and the out-of-order small role are set. The index values IV = 63 to 99 correspond to each small winning combination and bonus (IV = 13 to 49) in the normal game mode, and the corresponding winning combination is set.

When determining the winning or failing of a combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. 62, the probability of winning a special replay (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1/3, which is a special strong cherry. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 63) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning a special weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 64) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a special watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 65) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning a special chance A (probability of winning when IV = 66) is about 252 minutes. 1. The probability of winning the special chance B (the probability of winning when IV = 67) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the special middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 68) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the special unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 69) is about 65500. It is one-third. The probability of winning the special forward push bell 1, the special forward push bell 2, the special pinch push bell 1, and the special pinch push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 70 to 73) is about 1/164, respectively. The probability of winning the special middle push bell 1, the special middle push bell 2, the special right push bell 1, and the special right push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 74 to 77) is about 1 / 16.4, respectively. be. The probability of winning the special strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 81) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the special strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 82). ) Is about 1 in 4680, the probability of winning the special weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 83) is about 1 / 3280, and the probability of winning the special weak cherry duplication 2 (IV =). The probability of winning at 84) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the special watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 85) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the special watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 86) is. It is about 1/6550. The probability of winning Special Chance A Duplicate 1, Special Chance A Duplicate 2, Special Chance B Duplicate 1, Special Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 87-90) is about 1/3280 each. be. The probability of winning the special middle bell duplication 1 and the special middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 91, 92) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single PBB and the second PBB (probability of winning when IV = 93, 94) is about 1/65500, respectively.

That is, in a specific mode, special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special unquestioned bell, special forward push bell 1, 2, special pinch push bell 1, 2, Special middle push bell 1, 2, special right push bell 1, 2, special strong cherry duplication 1, 2, special weak cherry duplication 1, 2, special watermelon duplication 1, 2, special chance A duplication 1, 2, special chance B duplication 1,2, special middle bell duplication 1,2, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB The probability of winning is normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, chance B, during the normal game state in the normal game mode. Middle bell, unquestioned bell, forward push bell 1, 2, pinch push bell 1, 2, middle push bell 1, 2, right push bell 1, 2, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon duplication 1 , 2, Chance A overlap 1, 2, Chance B overlap 1, 2, Middle bell overlap 1, 2, 1st BB, 2nd BB is the same as the probability of winning.

Although each of the above special roles has the same winning probability as each role in the normal game mode, the probability may not be exactly the same, but may be slightly different. In this case, it is preferable that the probabilities are such that the players cannot recognize that they have different winning probabilities.

Further, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 62 in the specific mode, in addition to each of the above winning combinations, the special first promotion replays 1 to 4, the special fall replays 1 to 3, and the special second promotion Replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, and the role of one out-of-order card (hereinafter referred to as "special push order replay") are won. Specifically, the probability of winning the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 (probability of winning when IV = 52 to 55) is about 1/2, and the probability of winning the special fall replays 1 to 3 Probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 56 to 58) is about 1/2, and probability of winning in special second promotion replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV = 59,60) The probability) is about 1 / 8.2, and the probability of winning the special BAR replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV = 61, 62) is about 1 / 8.2. And, the probability of winning the winning one-card combination (the probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/35.

As already explained, the PCB is not won in the specific mode. Further, in the specific mode, the probability of losing any of the winning combinations in the normal gaming state is 0, and one of the winning combinations is always won.

That is, in the specific mode of the present embodiment, the winning combination corresponding to each winning combination in the normal game mode is won with the same probability, and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination when the RT state shifts in the normal game mode (special). 1st promotion replay 1-4, special fall replay 1-3, special 2nd promotion replay 1, 2, special BAR replay 1, 2, these are collectively referred to as "special transition role") is also a normal game in the specific mode Win in the state.

As described above, all of the winning combinations of the special transition combination are set to include the out-of-order small combination. When the special transition combination is won, it depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 whether the out-of-order small combination prize is established or another lip small combination prize is established.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, the out-of-order small winning combination and the first lip small winning combination are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , One of the 3rd rip small winning combination is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the special fall replays 1 to 3 are won, the out-of-order small winning combination, the first lip small winning combination, and the first rip small winning combination are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. One of the two small winning combination prizes is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In addition, if the special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the out-of-order small role prize, the 4th lip small role prize, and the 5th lip small role prize will be won. Either one is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 63 (d), when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the out-of-order small winning combination, the first lip small winning combination, and the first rip small winning combination are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Any of the 6 rip small winning combination prizes to the 8th rip small winning combination winning is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When these special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 and special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left. In each case, the operation order and the winning mode are related so that the small winning combination winning is established. That is, in the specific mode, even if these special transition combinations are won in the normal game state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, various rip small combination prizes are not won but small deviations. It is set so that the winning combination is established, and even if these special transition combinations are won, various small winning combination winnings will not be established unless the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched. In other words, even when these special transition combinations are won, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched, it is possible to establish various small combination prizes.

In addition, the first winning combination in the specific mode is set to include the small winning combination, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the small winning combination is established or the first. It is different whether or not the small role prize is established.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), when one winning combination is won, the small winning combination is won and the first lip is small, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. One of the winning combinations is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

Even in the case of a single winning combination, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated from the left, the operation order and the winning mode are related so that the small winning combination is established. That is, in the specific mode, when the first winning combination is won in the normal game state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, the small winning combination is established and the operation order is matched. Unless, the first lip small role prize will not be established. In other words, it is possible to establish the first lip small winning combination if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched even when the winning combination is won.

In addition, the special push order bells (special forward push bells 1, 2, special pinch push bells 1, 2, special middle push bells 1, 2, special right push bells 1, 2) in the specific mode are the same as in the normal game mode. The operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the established bell are different, and the corresponding winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the special middle push bell 1 is won, the 2nd P small winning combination or the 5th small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. The stop information is set, the stop information is set so that the first P small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second P small winning combination is won when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Alternatively, stop information is set so that the 5th P small winning combination is established. Then, if the corresponding winning is not established due to the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the special transition roll is stopped at the bent line L6.

<Game mode switching effect>
The normal game mode and the specific mode can be switched by the player operating the second effect switch 67 in a situation where the game is not performed (a situation in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped). It has become. In this case, a switching effect between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed based on the operation of the second effect switch 67.

When switching to a specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the character display "free mode" indicating the specific mode and the specific mode being a practice mode are used as the effect at the time of switching the specific mode. As a display for understanding, for example, a line with a balloon saying "Practice with us !!" by a girl character is displayed. In addition, in the effect at the time of switching the specific mode, a display is performed to teach that the normal game mode is restored by operating the second effect switch 67 again.

When switching to the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), as a normal game mode switching effect, the character display indicating the normal game mode and the operation of the second effect switch 67 are performed. A display is displayed to teach that the mode can be switched to a specific mode.

As described above, the display switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed by the second effect switch 67 connected to the display control device 81 on the sub side. In the slot machine 10, information is output from the main control device 101 side to the display control device 81 by various commands and the like, but information is not output from the display control device 81 side to the main control device 101. .. This is to reduce the input of information to the main control device 101, which performs processing mainly related to the interests of the player, as much as possible, thereby making it difficult to perform an act of illegally enjoying the interests. Therefore, whether or not the game mode switching effect is performed on the display control device 81 side is not specified on the main control device 101 side, and on the main control device 101 side, the lottery table or the effective line is used according to the number of bets. It only switches between. By doing so, the game different from the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed without significantly increasing the processing load on the main control device 101 side in which the pass / fail judgment (lottery process) or the like that is related to the profit of the player is performed. The mode is feasible.

<Explanation of processing on the main control device 101 side when betting one bet>
The flow of processing on the main control device 101 side when the number of bets is one will be described.

In the normal process (FIG. 15), after the start waiting process in step S204 is performed, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets is a specified number. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S205 is the case where it is determined that the number of bets has reached the specified number according to the gaming state, and in this slot machine 10, except when the gaming state is the bonus state. When the number of bets is 1 or 3, it is determined that the specified number has been reached. That is, in step S205, the execution of the specific mode of the 1-bet mode is permitted regardless of whether or not the switching effect is performed on the display control device 81 side.

In the mode transition notification process in step S206, as shown in FIG. 35, if the number of precursor games is not 0 (step S1101: NO), the present notification process is terminated as it is. The counting of the number of precursor games will be described later, but it is not counted when the number of bets is one. Therefore, the phenomenon that the number of precursor games in the normal game mode is subtracted during the game in the specific mode is avoided. If the number of precursor games is 0 (step S1101: YES), the output settings of the challenge mode start command, the attack winning notification command, and the VB mode winning notification command are set regardless of the number of bets (step S1105, step S1110). , Step S1114). Therefore, when the number of precursor games becomes 0 in the previous game played in the normal game mode, the notification of that fact is surely performed at the time of betting regardless of the number of bets in the next game, for example, in the normal game mode. If the attack mode or the like has been won, it is possible to play the game in the specific mode after recognizing it.

The bet command set in step S207 in the normal process includes information on the number of bets in the game to be started this time. That is, the information that the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated and three bets are made, the information that the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated and one bet is made, and the third credit insertion. It contains any information that the switch 58 has been operated to place two bets. Since this is a one-card bet game, the bet command set in step S207 includes information that one bet has been made.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S208: YES), the effective line setting process is performed in step S209. Since this is a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as effective lines.

In the lottery process of step S211 as shown in FIG. 16, in step S302, a lottery table (FIG. 62) for a specific mode corresponding to the number of bets this time is acquired. Then, the process for determining whether or not the result is obtained in steps S303 to S308 is performed based on the lottery table. That is, only the lottery table used differs depending on the number of bets, and the winning / failing determination is performed by a common process regardless of the number of bets.

Incidentally, in the lottery table (FIG. 17 and the like) referred to in the normal game mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for each of the index values IV = 50 to 99. Therefore, not only is it not possible to win each combination in the normal game mode in the specific mode, but it is also set so that each special combination for the specific mode is not won in the normal game mode.

In the process of dealing with the lottery result in step S310, when one bet is made, a specific role (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1,2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon Duplicate 1, 2, Chance A Duplicate 1, 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, 2, Middle Bell Duplicate 1, 2, and Push Order (1st Promotion Replay 1-4, Fall Replay 1-3, 2nd Promotion Replay) "Push order replay" consisting of 1, 2 and BAR replays 1 and 2, "Push order bell 1 and 2 consisting of forward push bells 1 and 2, pinch push bells 1 and 2, middle push bells 1 and 2 and right push bells 1 and 2" ") Will not be won. Therefore, at the time of one bet, none of the first specific combination processing, the second specific combination processing, the third specific combination processing, and the push order combination processing shown in FIG. 31 is performed. Further, even in the special zone processing, in the additional lottery table in the additional lottery processing in the attack mode, the number of additional games is set for the winning combination that is not won at the time of one bet. Therefore, even if the processing for the special zone is performed with one bet, the number of games is not added. By the way, the number of continuous games in the special zone is not counted when one bet, so even if the game is played in a specific mode during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the special zone will not be affected. ..

In the lottery process (FIG. 16), after the lottery result correspondence process is performed, the process of setting the lottery result command is performed in step S311. Information on the current lottery result is set in the lottery result command regardless of the number of bets. Therefore, at the time of one bet, information on any of the various special roles won at IV = 50 to 99 (FIG. 62) is included in the lottery result command this time.

In the normal process (FIG. 15), after the lottery process is executed, the reel control process (step S212) is performed. In the reel control process, regardless of the number of bets, a process for starting rotation (step S401 to step S402) and a process for stopping rotation (step S403 to step S412) are performed, and when all reels are stopped (step S411). : YES), the payout determination process is performed in step S413. In the payout determination process, the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning winning combination is set on condition that the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag. At the time of one bet, one medal is set to be paid out as a privilege (FIGS. 57 to 59) associated with each winning combination.

In the winning result handling process, in the game number management process (FIG. 39) of step S1301, when the number of bets is 1 as a specific number in step S1401, each process (step S1402 to step S1427) is not performed. This management process is terminated. Therefore, at the time of one-card bet, the subtraction process of the number of precursor games, the subtraction process of the challenge mode continuation number, the subtraction process of the attack mode continuation number, the subtraction process of the VB mode continuation number, and the subtraction process of the special zone continuation number are performed. do not have. In addition, since the 3rd to 5th re-game winnings and the 7th re-gaming winnings are not established when one bet is made, a negative determination is made in each of the processes of step S1302, step S1308, and step S1314, and the winning result handling process is terminated as it is. ..

In the reel control process (FIG. 18), after the winning result corresponding processing is performed, the processing for setting the winning result command is performed in step S415. Information on the current winning result is set in the winning result command regardless of the number of bets. Therefore, at the time of one bet, the 1st P small role to the 32nd P small role, the special replay, the 1st lip small role to the 8th lip small role, the 1st PBB, the 2nd PBB, the PCB, the special transition roll, the small loss Information on the winning result of any of the roles is included in this winning result command.

In the normal process (FIG. 15), in the medal payout process (step S213), one medal payout, which is a privilege at the time of one bet, is performed. In the RT state processing (FIG. 21) of step S214, since neither the transition roll nor the second to fifth replay winnings are established at the time of one bet, the processing of each RT setting flag is not performed. That is, the RT state does not shift at the time of one bet.

In the bonus state processing (FIG. 26) of step S215, the set number of the maximum payout number in the bonus differs depending on the winning bonus. Specifically, the special BB determined in step S612 indicates a first PBB or a second PBB, and these bonuses are bonuses that are won only when one bet is made. If it is determined in step S612 that the bonus won this time is a special BB, the number of remaining payouts is set to 24 in step S614. The reason why the maximum number of payouts differs between the first BB and the second BB and the first PBB and the second PBB will be described in detail later.

In the bonus state process, in the end determination process (FIG. 40), the presence or absence of a small winning combination is determined in step S1501 regardless of the number of bets, and the process of subtracting the current payout number from the remaining payout number is performed (step S1502). .. During the bonus state at the time of betting one card, the 29th P small winning combination to the 31st P small winning combination are established, and one medal is paid out for each. That is, at the time of one-card bet, the increase of medals cannot be expected even in the bonus state, and the decrease of medals does not occur. Then, when the number of remaining payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES), the bonus end command is set (step S1505). This process is the same as for a three-card bet.

However, since the various mode winning flags and various addition flags are not set at the time of 1st PBB, 2nd PBB winning, and during the bonus state at the time of 1 bet, the end determination process is terminated without setting the precursor command or the addition command. ..

Here, regardless of the number of bets, only one bonus can be won and carried over at one opportunity in each state, and it is set so that no other bonus will be won when one bonus is won. Has been done. More specifically, regardless of the number of bets, if any BB is won in each state, the other BB is not won. Therefore, in the situation where the 1st BB is won or the bonus state based on the 1st BB winning at the time of 3 bets, the lottery of the 2nd BB as well as the 1st BB is not performed, and the situation where the 2nd BB is won or the first In the bonus state based on the 2BB prize, the lottery of the first BB as well as the second BB is not performed. In addition, at the time of one bet, in the situation where the first PBB is won or the bonus state based on the first PBB prize, the lottery of the second PBB as well as the first PBB is not performed, and the situation where the second PBB is won or the first. In the bonus state based on the 2PBB winning, the lottery of the 1st PBB as well as the 2nd PBB is not performed.

Furthermore, in the situation where the first BB or the second BB is won or the bonus state based on the first BB prize or the second BB prize at the time of three bets, even if the game is played with one bet, the first PBB or the second PBB No lottery will be held. On the contrary, in the situation where the first PBB or the second PBB is won or the bonus state based on the first PBB prize or the second PBB prize at the time of one bet, even if the game is played with three bets, the first BB or the second BB The lottery will not be held.

Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, each BB is not won in duplicate, and the bonus state is not duplicated.

As described above, in the game at the time of one bet, basically, the bet command including the information that one bet has been made from the main control device 101, the information of the lottery result at the time of one bet. A lottery result command including, and a winning result command including information on the winning result at the time of betting one bet are output to the display control device 81. On the display control device 81 side, based on each of these commands, a processing for notification is performed so that the game in the normal game mode can be simulated.

<Explanation of processing on the display control device 81 side at the time of betting on one sheet>
In the specific mode, the display mode in the normal game mode is simulated. Specifically, in the specific mode, each of the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the special zone in the normal game mode is set as a pseudo display challenge mode, a display attack mode, a display VB mode, and a display special. Experience it as a conversion zone. Each of these display modes shifts based on the lottery result and winning result at the time of one bet.

Specifically, the challenge mode for display is a special special role (special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special strong cherry duplication 1, 2, special weak cherry duplication 1, 2. Special watermelon duplication 1, 2, special chance A duplication 1, 2, special chance B duplication 1, 2, special middle bell duplication 1, 2) Transition by winning the transition lottery based on the winning.

In addition, the display attack mode can also be shifted by winning the transition lottery performed based on the above-mentioned special specific combination winning. However, the display attack mode shifts when the transition lottery has been won and when the third lip small winning combination is established.

The display VB mode can be switched by winning the transition lottery performed when the special specific combination is won during the display attack mode. However, the display VB mode shifts to the case where the transition lottery has been won and the fourth and fifth lip small winning combination prizes have been established.

In addition, the display special zone shifts when the special BAR replay is won and the 7th lip small winning combination is established during the display VB mode.

Hereinafter, the flow of processing on the display control device 81 side when the number of bets is one, which enables each mode transition for these displays, will be described.

The processing at the time of one bet on the display control device 81 side is roughly divided into the bet time effect setting process for the specific mode in the bet time effect setting process (FIG. 43) and the specific mode process in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 44). There is a stop-time effect setting process for a specific mode in the start-time effect setting process and the stop-time effect setting process (FIG. 46). Each will be described below.

<Production setting process when betting for specific mode>
First, the effect setting process at the time of betting for a specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this effect setting process is a process executed when the received bet command is a bet command corresponding to the specific number of sheets (1) (step S1801: YES).

The bet time effect setting process for the specific mode is roughly divided into a process for starting the specific mode (step S2501 to step S2506) and a process for notifying the mode transition (step S2507 to step S2521).

That is, as the process for starting the specific mode, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The specific mode flag is a flag set based on the operation of the second effect switch 67, and the CPU 181 specifies the state in which the specific mode flag is set as the specific mode. If it is not set, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the start command has been received. The start command is a lottery result command or the like output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41.

When it is determined in step S2502 that the start command has been received, the bet command determined as the bet command corresponds to one bet, and the start lever 41 is not switched to the specific mode. This is the case when the start operation of is performed. Specifically, for example, the act of winning the first BB or the like in the normal game mode and attempting to establish the first BB prize with a single bet in the next game or later is applicable. In this case, after setting other betting effects in step S2503, the present effect setting process ends. In step S2503, for example, a process of turning off the built-in lamps of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 based on the bet operation is performed.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2504, and it is determined whether or not the second effect switch 67 as the changeover button has been operated. If the second effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2502. When the operation of the second effect switch 67 is performed, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is in progress. In the present embodiment, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible during these bonus states and bonus carry-over states, and if it is determined in step S2505 that these states are in progress, step S2502 is performed. return. That is, in these states, the operation of the switching button after the bet operation is invalid. If it is determined in step S2505 that these states are not present, the specific mode flag is set in step S2506.

When the specific mode flag is set in step S2501, or after the specific mode flag is set in step S2506, the mode transition notification process after step S2507 is performed. The mode transition notification process corresponds to the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the number of display precursor games is 0. The display precursor game number indicates the number of continuous games in the pseudo precursor mode in the specific mode. The number of display precursor games is counted in the stop time effect setting process for a specific mode, which will be described later, and the number of display precursor games is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted.

When the number of display precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S2508 whether or not the display challenge mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display challenge mode winning flag corresponds to the challenge mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag set through the transition lottery performed at the time of winning the special specific combination in the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode. be. If the display challenge mode winning flag is set, the display challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S2509. Then, in step S2510, the display challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display challenge mode flag corresponds to the challenge mode flag on the main control device 101 side. In step S2511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display challenge mode start effect is performed.

In this case, the display control device 81 acquires the image data for the challenge mode start effect from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the image data for the identification display from the identification regular effect data storage area 182c of the ROM 182. To get. Then, after adding the image data for identification display to the image data for the challenge mode start effect, the image data for the display challenge mode start effect is set.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the display challenge mode start effect is substantially the same as the challenge mode start effect. The difference is that in the display challenge mode start effect, the stamp 65a as image data for identification display called "free" representing the specific mode exists in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is the challenge mode. It is added so that it exists on the front side with respect to the image data of the start effect. That is, the display challenge mode start effect is for identification display acquired from the identification regular effect data storage area 182c with respect to the image data for the challenge mode start effect acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b. The image data of the stamp 65a is added to the effect.

As described above, there is a difference between the display challenge mode start effect and the challenge mode start effect, that is, the presence or absence of the stamp 65a as the identification display. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the current game mode is the specific mode when the display challenge mode start effect is displayed. In this case, the display challenge mode start effect uses the effect data for the challenge mode start effect to create the effect data. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the effect data for the display challenge mode start effect is separately stored.

Since the same as above is applied to the creation of the effect data when performing the effect for other displays, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S2512, counting of the number of continuous display challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the display challenge mode is set in the display challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 183b. The display challenge mode continuation counter corresponds to the challenge mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the display challenge mode is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Is set.

When it is determined in step S2508 that the display challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S2513 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. The display attack mode winning flag corresponds to the attack mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag set through the transition lottery performed at the time of winning the special specific combination in the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode. be. If the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S2514. Then, in step S2515, the display attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display attack notification flag corresponds to the attack notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and it is possible to establish the third lip small winning combination by winning the display attack mode transition lottery. It is a flag to do. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2516.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), the display attack mode winning notification effect is substantially the same as the attack mode winning notification effect. The difference is that in the display attack mode winning notification effect, the stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is present on the front side with respect to the image data of the attack mode winning notification effect. Has been added to.

When it is determined in step S2513 that the display attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S2517 whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set. The display VB mode winning flag corresponds to the VB mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag set through the transition lottery performed at the time of winning the special specific combination in the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode. be. If the display VB mode winning flag is set, the display VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S2518. Then, in step S2519, the display VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display VB notification flag corresponds to the VB notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and when the display VB mode transition lottery is won, the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes are awarded. It is a flag to make it feasible. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2520.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the display VB mode winning notification effect is substantially the same as the VB mode winning notification effect. The difference is that in the display VB mode winning notification effect, the stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is present on the front side with respect to the image data of the VB mode winning notification effect. Has been added to.

If the display precursor mode is not 0 in step S2507, or if the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S2517, after executing any of the processes of step S2512, step S2516, and step S2520, After setting other betting effects in step S2521, the present effect setting process ends.

<Starting effect setting process for specific mode>
Next, the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67. As described above, this effect setting process is a process executed when the received start command is a lottery result command corresponding to the specific number of sheets (1) (step S1901: YES).

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set, this effect setting process ends as it is. That is, in the game at the time of one bet started without switching the game mode to the specific mode by the operation of the second effect switch 67, the start effect is not set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2602. The processing after step S2602 is configured as follows. Step S2602: Winning combination correspondence process for specific mode, Step S2603: Display mode setting process for specific mode, Step S2604: Bonus notification process for specific mode, Step S2605: Continuous effect setting process for specific mode, Step S2606: Other start Time effect setting process. The display mode setting process for the specific mode is the same process as the display mode setting process (step S1903) in the normal game mode, and the display mode in the current specific mode is specified based on the flags corresponding to various display modes. , The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

Hereinafter, the process for responding to the winning combination for the specific mode will be described, and since the process for notifying the bonus for the specific mode and the process for setting the continuous effect for the specific mode are related to the continuous effect, etc., the process for setting the effect when stopped for the specific mode has been described. Each will be explained later.

<Processing for winning combination for specific mode>
The winning combination handling process for the specific mode corresponds to the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 68, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special specific combination based on the received lottery result command. In the case of a special specific role, in step S2702, the display mode in the current specific mode is neither the display challenge mode, the display attack mode, the display VB mode, or the display special zone, and the display is normal. Determine if it is a mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the first specific combination process for the specific mode is executed in step S2704.

If it is determined in step S2702 that the mode is not the normal display mode, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display mode in the current specific mode is determined in step S2705. Determines whether or not is the display attack mode. In the case of the display attack mode, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set. If the display VB mode winning flag is not set, the second specific combination process for the specific mode is executed in step S2707.

If it is determined in step S2705 that the mode is not the display attack mode, or if it is determined in step S2706 that the display VB mode winning flag is set, the third specific combination process for the specific mode is performed in step S2708. Run.

After executing any of the processes of step S2702, step S2707, and step S2708, in step S2709, the specific mode specific combination notification process is executed. The specific combination notification process for the specific mode corresponds to the specific combination notification process in the normal game mode, and is related to continuous production, and will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the special specific combination is not won, the lottery result this time is the special push order combination ("special push order bell" based on the lottery result command received in step S2710. , And "special push order replay"). If it is a special push order combination, the push order combination process for a specific mode is executed in step S2711.

When a negative determination is made in step S2710, or after the process of step S2709 or step S2711 is executed, it is determined in step S2712 whether or not the display special zone flag is set. If the display special zone flag is set, the specific mode special zone process is performed in step S2713. If a negative determination is made in step S2712, or after the process of step S2713 is executed, the true selection correspondence process ends.

<First specific combination processing for specific mode>
This processing corresponds to the first specific combination processing (FIG. 32) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 69, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, a normal time table for display attack mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a in step S2802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, a challenge mode table for display attack mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a in step S2803. The normal time table and the challenge mode table are the same as the table provided for the normal game mode on the main controller 101 side, and the transition winning rate of the strong cherry is replaced with the transition winning rate of the special strong cherry. , The transition winning rate of weak cherries is replaced with the transition winning rate of special weak cherries, and so on. Each special specific role) is replaced with a specific role. This also applies to tables for other specific modes.

After acquiring the display attack mode transition lottery table in step S2802 or step S2803, the display attack mode lottery process is executed in step S2804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b, and the lottery is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S2802 or step S2803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the display attack mode.

In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2804. If the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode is won, the process of setting the display attack mode winning flag is performed in step S2806.

In the following step S2807, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S2808. In step S2808, the number of precursor games for display of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In step S2809, based on the processing result of step S2808, a process of inputting the number of display precursor games into the display precursor counters of various counter areas 183b is performed. The display precursor counter is decremented by 1 each time a 1-bet game is played.

In step S2810, a process of setting the display precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2807, or after the processing of step S2810 is executed, the specific combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode has not been won, the display challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S2811. In the display challenge mode lottery process, the display challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The display challenge mode lottery table is the same as the challenge mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2812, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2811. If it is determined that the display challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S2813 whether or not the display challenge mode is used. In the display normal mode, in step S2814, a process of setting the display challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed.

In the following step S2815, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won, and if not, the lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is executed in step S2816, and the number of precursor games for display is executed in step S2817. Is executed in the precursor counter, the process of setting the precursor flag for display is executed in step S2818, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S2815 to S2818 correspond to steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2813 that the display challenge mode has been won again during the display challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game of the display challenge mode is performed in steps S2819 to S2823. That is, in step S2819, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S2820, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the display challenge mode is executed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the display challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the display challenge mode is the same as the table for drawing the number of additional games in the challenge mode on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2821, the number of games in the display challenge mode is added. In such a process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by the lottery in step S2820 to the display challenge mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S2822, the additional effect for display is set. The display additional effect is substantially the same as the additional effect in the normal game mode, and the stamp 65a is on the front side of the display image in the normal game mode additional effect as the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65. Added to exist. In step S2822, only the setting of the display additional effect is performed, and the execution of the display additional effect is performed in the stop time effect setting process. This also applies to the setting process of other additional effects.

After executing the process of step S2822, the present specific combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2819, the display challenge mode addition flag is set in step S2823, and then the specific combination processing is terminated.

<Second specific combination processing for specific mode>
This processing corresponds to the second specific combination processing (FIG. 33) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 70, in step S2901, a process of grasping the rank of the display attack mode is performed. Even in the specific mode, the display attack mode is provided with four ranks of the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode, and the transition probability to the display VB mode is different for each rank. Step S2901 determines whether the rank of the current display attack mode is any of the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode.

In step S2902, the display VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the display attack mode grasped in step S2901 is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. The display VB mode lottery table is the same as the VB mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2903, the display VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S2902 and the lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S2903 corresponds to the display VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, a process of setting the display VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed in step S2905. After that, in steps S2906 to S2909, a process for setting the number of precursor games for display is performed in the same manner as in steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2904 that the result of the display VB mode lottery process is not the display VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, a display attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, a table for promotion lottery for display is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 183b. The display promotion lottery table is the same as the promotion lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S2910 is a promotion win. If the promotion is won, in step S2912, the promotion process of the display attack mode in which the display rank flag is set corresponding to the rank of the promotion destination is performed. After that, in step S2913, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the promotion effect for display is performed. In the display promotion effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the display image in the promotion effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S2911 that the promotion lottery for display has not been won, or after the process of step S2913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S2914 to S2920.

That is, in step S2914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. In such an additional lottery process, a table for the display attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The display attack mode additional lottery table is the same as the attack mode additional lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

Then, in step S2915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S2916 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S2917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for drawing the number of additional games in the display attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode for display is the same as the table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2918, the number of games in the display attack mode is added. In such a process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by the lottery in step S2917 to the display attack mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S2919, the additional effect for display is set. After executing the process of step S2919, the present specific combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2916, the display attack mode addition flag is set in step S2920, and then the specific combination processing is terminated.

<Third specific combination processing for specific mode>
This processing corresponds to the third specific combination processing (FIG. 34) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 71, in step S3001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2914.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S3001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S3004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. Then, in step S3005, the game number addition processing in the display attack mode is performed, and in step S3006, the display addition effect is set, and then the specific combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S3003 to S3006 is the same as the processing of steps S2916 to S2919.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the present specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S3003 that the bonus has been won, the display attack mode addition flag is set in step S3007, and then the specific combination processing is terminated.

<Pushing order processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the push order combination process (FIG. 37) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 72, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is any of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 based on the received lottery result command. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3101 is a case where any one of the first lip small winning combination, the third lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination wins a prize depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3102, and it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set.

If the display attack notification flag is set, whether or not the display attack mode flag is set in step S3103, that is, the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display addition special zone. It is determined whether or not it is one of the above. When the display attack mode flag is set, the process for notifying the push order of the third rip small winning combination is executed in step S3104. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the operation order corresponding to the third lip small combination winning is notified and produced among the first lip small combination, the third lip small combination, and the outlier small combination. (FIG. 63 (b)). Also in the operation order notification effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the display image of the operation order notification effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S3103 that the display attack mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3105, which corresponds to the first lip small combination winning among the first lip small combination, the third lip small combination, and the outlier small combination. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect of the operation order is performed (FIG. 63 (b)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3102, the final push order processing is terminated as it is without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3101 that it is not the special first promotion replays 1 to 4, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the current lottery result is any of the special fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3106 is a case where any one of the first lip small winning combination, the second lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3107, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, in step S3105, the process for notifying the push order of the first rip small winning combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first lip small combination is performed among the first lip small combination, the second lip small combination, and the outlier small combination. (FIG. 63 (b)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3107, the final push order processing is terminated as it is without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, one of the first lip small winning combination, the second lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small combination winning is established.

If it is determined in step S3106 that it is not the special fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S3108 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3108 is a case where any one of the first rip small winning combination, the fourth rip small winning combination, the fifth rip small winning combination, and the out-of-pulling small winning combination wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3110 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set.

When the display VB notification flag is set, the process for notifying the push order of the 4th rip small combination or the 5th rip small combination is executed in step S3111. Specifically, among the 1st lip small role, the 4th lip small role, the 5th lip small role, and the out-of-order small role, the notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the 4th lip small role or the 5th lip small role winning is performed. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to be performed (FIG. 63 (c)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3110, it means that the attack mode for display is set and the VB mode for display has not been won. In this case, in step S3105, the process for notifying the push order of the first small combination is executed, and then the main push order process is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3109, the main push order combination process is terminated as it is without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3108 that it is not the special second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S3112 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3112 is a case where any one of the first rip small winning combination, the sixth to eighth rip small winning combination, and the out-of-pulling small winning combination wins, depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, in step S3113, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3114 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set and the display VB notification flag is set, in step S3115, the process for notifying the push order of the 6th lip small combination to the 8th lip small combination is performed. Run. Specifically, among the 1st rip small winning combination, the 6th to 8th rip small winning combination, and the out-of-small combination, the operation order corresponding to the 6th rip small winning combination to the 8th rip small winning combination is notified (FIG. 63). (D)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3114, the process for notifying the push order of the first rip small combination is executed in step S3105, and then the main push order process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3114, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3114 that it is not the special BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S3116 whether or not the current lottery result is the special push order bell winning. If the special push order bell is won, it is determined in step S3117 whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set and is currently in any of the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display addition special zone, the first P small winning combination is supported in step S3118. A process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order is executed (FIG. 64). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3116, the push order notification process is not performed, and the push order combination process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S3115 that the special push order bell has not been won, it is determined in step S3119 whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a winning combination. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3119 is a case where the first rip small winning combination or the out-of-small combination is won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3120, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. When the display attack mode flag is set, the push order notification process for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first lip small winning combination prize is executed in step S3121 (FIG. 64). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3120, the push order notification process is not performed, and the push order combination process is terminated as it is. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

<Processing for specialized zone for specific mode>
This processing corresponds to the specialized zone processing (FIG. 41) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the result of the lottery process this time is grasped in step S3201. In the following step S3202, a lottery process for adding the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. In the following step S3203, the number of games in the display attack mode is added. Then, in step S3204, after setting the additional effect for display, the processing for the special zone for the specific mode is terminated. The processing of steps S3202 to S3204 is the same as the processing of steps S2917 to S2919. However, the number of games selected in the process of drawing the number of additional games in step S3202 is larger than that in the process of drawing the number of additional games in step S2917.

<Production setting process when stopped for specific mode>
Next, the stop-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. As described above, this effect setting process is a process executed when the received stop command is a winning result command corresponding to the specific number of sheets (1) (step S2101: YES).

The stop time effect setting process for the specific mode is composed of the game number management process for the specific mode in step S3301, the winning result corresponding process for the specific mode in step S3302, and the bonus end process for the specific mode in step S3303. Each will be described below.

<Game number management process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the game number management process (FIG. 39) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 75, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the bonus is won or the bonus state. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3401, the game number management process is performed after clearing the display challenge mode flag, the display attack mode flag, the display VB mode flag, the display special zone flag, etc. in step S3402. To finish.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the number of precursor games for display is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S3404. When the number of display precursor games is 0 in step S3403 (when the display precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S3404 is executed, in steps S3405 to S3427, the number of continuous games in each mode is increased. Performs counting processing.

That is, in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is set. In the case of the display challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S3406 to subtract 1 from the display challenge mode continuation counter. Then, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display challenge mode flag is cleared in step S3408 and the display challenge mode end effect is performed in step S3409.

As shown in FIG. 79B, the display challenge mode end effect is substantially the same as the challenge mode end effect. In the display challenge mode end effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the challenge mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the mode is not the display challenge mode, it is determined in step S3410 whether or not the mode is the display attack mode. In the case of the display attack mode, the process proceeds to step S3411 to subtract 1 from the display attack mode continuation counter. Then, in step S3412, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display attack mode flag is cleared in step S3413, and the display attack notification flag is cleared in step S3414. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the attack mode end effect is performed in step S3415.

As shown in FIG. 80B, the display attack mode end effect is substantially the same as the attack mode end effect. In the display attack mode end effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the attack mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65. The display of the number of games and the number of acquired cards in the display attack mode will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3410 that the mode is not the display attack mode, the process proceeds to step S3416 to determine whether or not the display mode is VB mode. In the case of the display VB mode, in step S3417, it is determined whether or not the zone is a display addition special zone. If it is not a display addition special zone, a process of subtracting 1 from the display VB mode continuation counter is performed in step S3418. Then, in step S3419, it is determined whether or not the display VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display VB mode flag is cleared in step S3420, and the display VB notification flag is cleared in step S3421. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display VB mode end effect in step S3422.

As shown in FIG. 81B, the display VB mode end effect is substantially the same as the VB mode end effect. In the display VB mode end effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the VB mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65. The display of the number of games and the number of acquired cards in the display VB mode will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3417 that the zone is a display special zone, the process proceeds to step S3423 to subtract 1 from the display special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S3424, it is determined whether or not the display special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the special zone flag is cleared in step S3425 and the display special zone end effect is performed in step S3426. The special zone end effect for display is almost the same as the special zone end effect, and like the other display effects, the stamp 65a is on the front side with respect to the image data of the special zone end effect. Added to exist.

If a negative determination is made in step S3407, step S3412, step S3419, step S3416 or step S3424, or after the processing of step S3409, step S3415, step S3422 or step S3426 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3427. In step S3427, the addition notification process is executed. In such a process, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to execute the set additional display effect (step S2822, step S2919, step S3006, etc.). The additional effect for display is as described above. After executing the process of step S3427, the present management process is terminated.

<Processing for winning results for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 38) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 76, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the stop result of this time is the third lip small winning combination winning. If the third lip small winning combination is established, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set, the display attack mode is already set, and the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display attack mode flag is not set, the display attack mode flag is set in step S3504. In the following step S3505, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display attack mode start effect.

As shown in FIG. 80A, the display attack mode start effect is substantially the same as the attack mode start effect. In the display attack mode start effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the attack mode start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65.

After that, in step S3506, counting of the number of continuous display attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the display attack mode is set in the display attack mode continuation counter. The display attack mode continuation counter corresponds to the attack mode continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the display attack mode is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Is set. After performing the process of step S3506, the corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the third lip small winning combination prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S3507. In step S3507, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the 4th and 5th rip small winning combination prizes have been established. When the 4th and 5th rip small winning combination prizes are established, it is determined in step S3508 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3509 whether or not the display VB mode flag is set. If the display VB mode flag is set, the display VB mode is already set, and the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display VB mode flag is not set, the process of setting the display VB mode flag is performed in step S3510. After that, in step S3511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display VB mode start effect.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the display VB mode start effect is substantially the same as the VB mode start effect. In the display VB mode start effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the VB mode start effect in the auxiliary display unit 65.

After that, in step S3512, counting of the number of continuous display VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the display VB mode is set in the display VB mode continuation counter. The display VB mode continuation counter corresponds to the VB mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the display VB mode is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the VB mode. Is set. After the process of step S3512 is performed, the corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the 4th and 5th rip small winning combination prizes have not been established, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the 7th rip small winning combination winning has been established as a result of this stop. do. When the 7th lip small winning combination is established, it is determined in step S3514 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display VB notification flag is set, the process of setting the display special zone flag is performed in step S3515. After that, in step S3516, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display special zone start effect.

As shown in FIG. 82, the display special zone start effect is substantially the same as the special zone start effect. In the display special zone start effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the special zone start effect in the auxiliary display unit 65. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the above.

After that, in step S3517, counting of the number of continuous display special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the display special zone continuation counter. The special zone continuation counter for display corresponds to the special zone continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the special zone for display is the initial number of continuous games in the special zone. The same value as the value is set. After executing the process of step S3517, the corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3513 or step S3514, the corresponding process is terminated as it is.

<Bonus end processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the end determination process (FIG. 40) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 77, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the bonus end command has been received. The bonus end command is a command set in step S1505 in the end determination process on the main control device 101 side. If the bonus end command has not been received, the final end process is terminated as it is.

When the bonus end command is received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. When the display attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S3603, the number of precursor games for display is set in step S3604, and the number of precursor games for display is set in step S3605. Set the precursor flag. The processing of steps S3603 to S3605 is the same as the processing of steps S2808 to S2810. After executing the process of step S3605, the final process is terminated.

If the display attack mode winning flag is not set in step S3602, it is determined in step S3606 whether or not the display challenge mode winning flag is set. When the display challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then the final process is terminated. If the display challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S3606, it is determined in step S3607 whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set. When the display VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then the final process is terminated.

If the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S3607, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode addition flag is set. When the display attack mode addition flag is set, the display attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S3609, the display attack mode addition game number addition process is performed in step S3610, and the display attack mode addition number processing is performed in step S3611. Set the additional effect for display. The processing of steps S3609 to S3611 is the same as the processing of steps S2917 to S2919. However, the display addition effect set in step S3611 is executed at the relevant timing. After executing the process of step S3611, the end process is terminated.

If the display attack mode addition flag is not set in step S3608, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the display challenge mode addition flag is set. When the display challenge mode addition flag is set, the display challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S3613, the display challenge mode addition number game number addition process is performed in step S3614, and the display challenge mode addition number processing is performed in step S3615. Set the additional effect for display. The processing of steps S3613 to S3615 is the same as the processing of steps S2820 to S2822. However, the additional display effect set in step S3615 is executed at the relevant timing. If a negative determination is made in step S3612, or after the process of step S3615 is executed, the final process is terminated.

<Flow of games in each game mode>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal game mode implemented in the 3-bet mode or the 2-bet mode can be simulated in the 1-bet mode. Therefore, the flow and differences of each game mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. 83 and 84 show the flow of the game in the normal game mode, and FIGS. 85 and 86 show the flow of the game in the specific mode.

In the normal game mode, when the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state, the display mode is basically the normal mode. If a specific winning combination is won (winning) at the timing of ta1 in this situation, a lottery for shifting the display mode to the challenge mode or the attack mode is performed. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of ta2 via the precursor mode. After the attack mode winning notification effect is performed, the push order notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and when the push order combination is won, the push order notification for shifting the game state is sent. Will be done.

If the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won at the timing of ta3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the push order notification is performed so that the third replay winning prize is established. .. As a result, the third re-game winning prize is established, and the attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

By the way, the state from the attack mode winning notification effect to the attack mode start effect is the state in which the attack mode is being prepared, the push order combination is notified, and the game state is changed. This is the case of the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 for each game played. On the other hand, when the second re-game winning is established and the attack mode is being prepared and the attack mode is changed, the push order combination is notified and the game state is changed to the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game, and more medals can be obtained than in the state of preparation. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the attack mode earlier after the attack mode winning notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if you want to win the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, there is a possibility that the medals will gradually decrease even though the transition to the attack mode has been confirmed. Therefore, after the winning notification of the attack mode is performed (more specifically, after the state of winning the attack mode), the number of continuous games in the attack mode may be added by winning the specific combination. .. Therefore, even if the transition to the attack mode is not performed easily, it is possible to fully enjoy the game during that period.

When the attack mode is started at the timing of ta3, the gaming state becomes the second RT state, and the winning probability of the push order replay becomes higher than that of the first RT state or the normal gaming state. For example, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won at the timing of ta4, the push order notification that the first replay winning is established is performed during the attack mode. Therefore, during the attack mode, the occurrence of the event that the RT state falls due to the second re-game winning is avoided. Also, even if the push order bell is won during the attack mode, the push order notification that the bell winning is established is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the transition roll is stopped and the RT state falls due to the missed push order bell.

When a specific winning combination is won (winning) at the timing of ta5 in the attack mode, a lottery for shifting the display mode to the VB mode and a lottery for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode are performed. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is won, the VB mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of ta6 via the precursor mode. After the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the push order notification for the VB mode is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and if the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the fourth The push order notification that can establish the fifth re-game prize will be performed.

If the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of ta7, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the push order notification is established so that the 4th and 5th replay prizes are established. Is done. For example, when the fourth re-game winning is established, the VB mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

By the way, the state from the VB mode winning notification effect to the VB mode start effect is the state in which the VB mode is being prepared, the push order combination is notified, and the game state is changed. This is the case of the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Moreover, in the game from the VB mode winning notification effect to the VB mode start effect, the subtraction of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is stopped. Therefore, for example, if the push order notification is performed so that the 4th and 5th re-game prizes can be established, but the push order notification is not followed and the 1st re-game prize is established, the first re-game prize is established. There is a possibility that the game is played without starting the VB mode and reducing the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Therefore, for example, after the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, if the stop switches 42 to 44 that do not follow the push order notification are operated until the VB mode start effect is performed, a predetermined penalty is applied. May be. The predetermined penalties may be a configuration in which the number of continuous games in the attack mode is subtracted, the rank of the attack mode is demoted, or the attack mode is terminated. Further, as a configuration in which the VB mode is performed in the second RT state, a configuration in which the transition of the gaming state does not occur between the attack mode and the VB mode may be used. In this case, it is possible to start the VB mode without going through the 4th and 5th re-game winnings, and it is possible to eliminate the difference between the execution game of the VB mode winning notification effect and the execution game of the VB mode start effect.

In the VB mode, since it is in the 3rd RT state, there is a possibility that the BAR replays 1 and 2 will be won. If you win the BAR Replays 1 and 2 and you win the BAR Matching Lottery, you will be able to establish the 7th Replay Winning (Middle BAR Matching), and the 7th Replay Winning will be a special feature. Move to the conversion zone. The special zone continues until the number of continuous games in the special zone becomes 0, and then returns to the VB mode.

When the number of continuous games in the VB mode becomes 0 at the timing of ta8, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs the VB mode end effect. When the VB mode ends, the display mode shifts to the attack mode. Although the RT state is still the 3rd RT state, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification that the 6th to 8th replay winnings are established is not performed, so that the 3rd replay winning is established. Possibility arises. When the third re-game winning is established at the timing of ta9, the game state shifts to the second RT state.

When the number of continuous games in the attack mode becomes 0 at the timing of ta10, the attack mode end effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. When the attack mode ends, the display mode shifts from the attack mode to the normal mode. Although the RT state is still the 2nd RT state, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won and the 2nd replay prize is established, or when the push order bell is won and the bell is missed. (When the transition roll is stopped), the gaming state shifts to the first RT state.

On the other hand, in the specific mode, the game state is not changed. Hereinafter, for example, a case where the specific mode is executed in a situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state in the normal gaming mode will be described.

If a special specific combination is won (winning) at the timing of tb1, which is the normal mode for display, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode for display or the attack mode for display is performed. In this case, since the stop result of the special specific role is the same as the stop result of the specific role, the player shifts to the challenge mode or the attack mode when the specific role is won in the normal game mode. You can experience the lottery in a simulated manner in a specific mode.

For example, if the special specific combination won at the timing of tb1 wins the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode, the mode shifts to the display precursor mode. When the display attack mode final notification effect is performed at the timing of tb2, the push order notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

If the special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won at the timing of tb3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the 3rd lip small winning combination can be established. Sequential notification is performed. As a result, the third lip small winning combination is won, the display attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like, and the display attack mode is started.

In this case, the stop result of the third lip small winning combination that triggers the start of the attack mode for display is the same as the stop result of the third re-game prize that triggers the start of the attack mode in the normal game mode. ing. Therefore, the player can experience that the attack mode is started by the third re-game prize by winning the third lip small role. Further, the attack mode start effect and the display attack mode start effect have substantially the same display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, it is possible to experience the start of the attack mode in a simulated manner even when the start effect is performed.

On the other hand, there is a difference between the attack mode start effect and the display attack mode start effect, that is, the presence or absence of the stamp 65a. Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm in which game mode the game is being played, and for example, when such a simulated experience is to be captured in a photograph or the like. , The stamp 65a is inevitably reflected, and it can be a trigger to desire the experience in the actual normal game mode, not the simulated experience. The effect of displaying the stamp 65a is the same for other display effects.

Incidentally, the state from the display attack mode winning notification effect to the display attack mode start effect is the state in which the display attack mode is being prepared, and the special push order combination is notified. However, if the special fall replays 1 to 3, the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 or the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification is not performed on condition that the display attack mode is not set. A small role can be established. That is, the push order notification is performed when the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and when the special push order bell is won. On the other hand, when the display attack mode is started at the timing of tb3, for example, if the special fall replay games 1 to 3 are won at the timing of tb4, it is possible to establish the first lip small winning combination. The order notification is performed, and even when the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification that can establish the first lip small winning combination is performed. Not only that, when the display attack mode is started, the push order notification that can establish the first lip small winning combination is performed even when the winning of the first winning combination is won. Therefore, when the third lip small winning combination is established and the display attack mode is started, it is possible to experience in a simulated manner that the winning probability of the replay is improved.

When a special specific combination is won (winning) at the timing of tb5, a lottery for shifting to the display VB mode and a lottery for adding the number of continuous games in the display attack mode are performed. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the display VB mode is won, the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of tb6 via the precursor mode. After the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the push order notification for the display VB mode is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and when the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. Will be notified of the push order in which the 4th and 5th rip small winning combination prizes can be established.

If the special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of tb7, the push order notification is performed so that the special 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes are established. For example, when the 4th lip small winning combination is established, the display VB mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

In this case, the stop result of the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination that triggers the start of the display VB mode is the stop result of the 4th and 5th re-game winning that triggers the start of the VB mode in the normal game mode. It is the same result as. Therefore, the player can experience the start of the VB mode by the 4th and 5th re-game winnings in a simulated manner by winning the 4th and 5th lip small roles. Further, the VB mode start effect and the display VB mode start effect have substantially the same display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, it is possible to experience the start of the VB mode in a simulated manner by performing the start effect.

In the display VB mode, if the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, and if the BAR matching lottery is won, the 7th rip small winning combination prize (middle BAR matching) can be established. Then, by winning the 7th Lip Small Role, it will move to the special zone for display. The display special zone continues until the number of continuous games in the display special zone becomes 0, and then returns to the display VB mode.

When the number of continuous games in the display VB mode becomes 0 at the timing of tb8, the display VB mode end effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. When the display VB mode ends, the mode shifts to the display attack mode. However, in accordance with the transition of the RT state in the normal game mode, when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order report that enables the third rip small winning combination to be established is performed. When the third lip small winning combination is established at the timing of tb9, the gaming state pseudo-shifts to the second RT state (does not actually shift).

When the number of continuous games in the display attack mode becomes 0 at the timing of tb10, the display attack mode end effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. When the display attack mode ends, the display transition from the display attack mode to the display normal mode. In the present embodiment, by shifting from the display attack mode to the display normal mode, the display attack mode flag and the display attack notification flag are cleared, and the push order notification is not performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the pseudo transition of the RT state, the RT state shifts to the first RT state at the timing of tb10.

It should be noted that this configuration is used until the second lip small winning combination is established even after the end of the display attack mode or the special transition roll is stopped (for example, tb11) in accordance with the fall of the RT state in the normal game mode. (Until the timing) may be configured such that the push order notification is performed when the special push order combination other than the special fall replays 1 to 3 and the special push order bell is won. By doing so, it is possible to experience that the state in which the replay probability is improved continues until the RT state falls.

As described above, in the pseudo game in the specific mode performed as a 1-bet game, the RT state and the like are not provided, and the normal game state until the first PBB and the second PBB are won, and the first PBB and the first PBB. A bonus state based on the 2PBB winning is set. Then, in both the normal game state and the bonus state, one medal is paid out in each game of one bet, and the number of medals does not increase or decrease. By doing so, it is possible to experience the playability in the normal game mode in the specific mode without worrying about the increase or decrease of medals.

In this case, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to insert medals (the game can be executed by inserting 0 medals), and by inserting one medal, which is the minimum number, one bet is made. It is possible to execute the game of. That is, the specific mode is configured to be feasible at least by receiving a medal loan at the game hall, and the act of simply playing the specific mode game for free is suppressed. In addition, in a game hall where medals are lent out in units of a predetermined number (for example, 50), after experiencing a simulated game with the minimum number of medals, the remaining medals are used to play a game in the actual normal game mode. It can be a motivation to make it.

In addition, as a mode in which the number of medals does not increase or decrease, instead of realizing all of them as replaying roles, it is possible to win a role in which one payout such as various special roles (special watermelon role) is performed. As long as the number of medals is not increased or decreased, all the lottery results may be used as a replaying role, and it is considered that the operability of the specific mode is improved because the betting operation can be omitted by doing so. However, if all the lottery results are used as replaying roles in this way, one card is automatically inserted at the end of each game in the specific mode, and the setting for replaying is performed, and the specific mode ends. Can be difficult. In this case, for example, even if the setting for re-game is made, the setting may be canceled, or the power may be turned off / on and the game mode may be set again. There is a need. In that respect, as described above, since the configuration is such that one payout can be won, it is possible to switch from the specific mode to the normal game mode (the number of bets can be reset) except for the re-game combination winning game. , It is possible to add a novel playability of a specific mode to one gaming machine without adding a new configuration.

The payout rate (ball payout rate) of medals per game differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode. Therefore, in order to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic in the specific mode, it is necessary to make the outcome, staging, winning probability of each role, etc. common to both game modes, while the game hall. For, it is necessary to be able to identify in which game mode the game is being played. Therefore, by adding a stamp 65a as an identification display to each display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 in the specific mode, it is possible to easily identify that the game mode being executed is the specific mode.

Further, in this way, by displaying the identification of being in the specific mode on the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, when taking a commemorative photo of the display of the acquired number displayed in the attack mode end effect, it is simulated. It is possible to easily determine after the fact whether it is the number of acquisitions in the game experienced in the game or the number of acquisitions in the actual normal game mode.

In particular, since such identification display is performed not by the reels 32L, 32M, 32R but by the auxiliary display unit 65, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery of the winning combination is performed. The playability of the slot machine 10 itself, such as stopping each of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 and determining whether or not to win a winning combination, is performed in a specific mode. The identification display does not get in the way of the experience, and the simulated experience of the normal game mode can be made more realistic. That is, for example, when the identification display is seen when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, it is reminded that the mode is a pseudo mode, and there is a possibility that the so-called push-off is neglected. Therefore, as described above, by displaying the identification in a place that is difficult to see when operating the stop switches 42 to 44, even if it is a simulated experience, the game can be played with the same attention as in the normal game mode. It becomes possible to make it desired, and it becomes possible to improve the pseudo playability.

<Continuous production>
The continuous effect is an effect that starts when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes a predetermined number in the normal game mode and ends when the number of precursor games becomes 0, and is an effect that straddles a predetermined number of games. Is. In the specific mode of the present embodiment, it is possible to experience continuous production during the normal game mode. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode is won during the display normal mode, it is notified that the display attack mode has been won through the display precursor mode as described above. Then, the continuous effect is started when the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode reaches a predetermined number, and ends when the number of display precursor games becomes 0.

Hereinafter, the process for executing the continuous effect in the specific mode will be described. The process for executing the continuous effect includes a process for notifying a bonus for a specific mode, a process for notifying a specific combination for a specific mode, and a process for setting a continuous effect for a specific mode.

<Process for bonus notification for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the bonus notification process (FIG. 47) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 87, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a special bonus (first PBB, second PBB) winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. In the case of a special bonus winning game, in step S3702, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed in the specific mode. In the notification game lottery process, a shorter number of games is more likely to be selected than in the notification game lottery process in the normal game mode. Specifically, 1 notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 4 games.

In the following step S3703, a process of setting the number of continuous production games for display is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S3702. Specifically, in step S3703, the display continuous effect game is set in the display continuous effect counter. The display continuous effect counter corresponds to the continuous effect counter in the normal game mode, and is decremented by 1 each time the 1-bet game is executed. After executing the process of step S3703, the display continuous effect flag is set in step S3704.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or after the process of step S3704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to the start of the bonus game. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, the number of bonus effect games is set in the display bonus medium effect counter in step S3706. The display bonus medium effect counter corresponds to the bonus medium effect counter in the normal game mode. In this embodiment, 24 is set as the maximum number of special bonus payouts. Also, in the bonus game during the special bonus, a small winning combination is established for each game. Therefore, in the special bonus, 24 games are played as a bonus game. Therefore, in step S3706, 24 is input to the display bonus medium effect counter.

After that, in step S3707, the display bonus middle effect flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, or after the process of step S3707 is executed, the present notification process is terminated.

<Process for notifying specific role for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the process for notifying a specific combination (FIG. 48) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 88, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the display precursor flag is set. The display precursor flag may be set in the immediately preceding specific mode first specific combination process (FIG. 69) or the specific mode second specific combination process (FIG. 70). If the display precursor flag is not set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the display addition effect is set. The setting of the additional effect for display is set in the first specific combination process for the specific mode (FIG. 69), the second specific combination process for the specific mode (FIG. 70), and the third specific combination process for the specific mode (FIG. 71) immediately before. Can be done. If the additional display effect is not set, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a special specific role as a result of the lottery, you can switch to the display challenge mode, display attack mode, display VB mode, or add the number of continuous games. If the game is not won and the bonus is not won, the lottery process of the display pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S3804. The display pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the pseudo precursor mode in the normal game mode.

In step S3804, whether or not to acquire the display pseudo precursor mode lottery table from the various table storage areas 182a and acquire the lottery counters from the various counter areas 183b to execute the display pseudo precursor mode. A lottery will be held. The table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery for display is the same as the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the display pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S3804. If the game is won, in step S3806, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode for display is performed. Such a process corresponds to a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode in the normal game mode. In the following step S3807, a process is performed in which the number of pseudo precursor games for display determined in step S3806 is set in the continuous effect counter for display.

In step S3808, a process of setting a display pseudo flag indicating that the display pseudo precursor mode is set is executed. In the following step S3809, the display continuous effect flag is set. After that, the processing for this notification is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3801 to S3803, or if a negative determination is made in step S3805, the present notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous staging setting process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 49) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 89, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the display precursor flag is set. When the display precursor flag is set, in step S3902, the process of inputting the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode to the display continuous effect counter is performed. In the following step S3903, the display continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, or after the process of step S3903 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3904. In step S3904, it is determined whether or not the display continuous effect flag is set. When the display continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the display continuous effect counter is performed in step S3905. Then, in step S3906, it is determined whether or not the display continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the display continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not the display pseudo flag is set. If the display pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3908, and the display main precursor effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3909, the corresponding continuous effect effect data is specified from the display main sign effect table and the display continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b. At the same time, the staging data for the identification information is acquired from the staging data storage area 182c for the identification information, and the process of setting as the continuous staging of this time is performed.

The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the display effect table for the main sign is the same as the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the present sign in the normal game mode, and is the same as the other display effects. The stamp 65a is added so as to exist on the front side with respect to the image data of the continuous effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the display pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, a display pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3911, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the display pseudo precursor effect table and the display continuous effect counter, and the normal game effect data storage area 182b and the identification information effect data storage area are specified. The effect data is acquired from 182c, and the process of setting as the continuous effect of this time is performed.

The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo-precursor effect table for display is the same as the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo-precursor effect table in the normal game mode, and is the same as the other display effects. , The stamp 65a as an identification display is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the continuous effect in the normal game mode.

After performing the process of step S3909 or step S3911, it is determined in step S3912 whether or not the display continuous effect counter is 0. When the display continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the display continuous effect flag and the display pseudo flag is performed in step S3913. If the display pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3906 or step S3912, or after the process of step S3913 is performed, the present setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the display continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, it is determined whether or not the display bonus medium effect flag is set. If it is set, in step S3915, the display bonus middle effect counter is subtracted. In the following step S3916, a display bonus effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3917, the effect data of the corresponding bonus effect is specified from the display bonus effect table and the display bonus effect counter, and the normal game effect data storage area 182b and the identification information effect data storage. The effect data is acquired from the area 182c, and the process of setting it as the effect during this bonus is performed.

The effect data of the bonus medium effect specified from the display bonus effect table is the same as the effect data of the bonus medium effect specified from the bonus effect table in the normal game mode, and is the same as other display effects. , Stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode.

In step S3918, it is determined whether or not the display bonus medium effect counter is 0. If the display bonus medium effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the display bonus medium effect flag is performed in step S3919. After that, this setting process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3914 or step S3918, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the game in the specific mode, the display precursor mode in which the continuous effect is finally performed based on the display challenge mode winning, the display attack mode winning, and the display VB mode winning. Set. In addition, continuous production is set based on the bonus winning. In addition, when the specific combination is won, if the transition lottery of each mode is not won and the additional lottery is not won, the pseudo precursor mode for display corresponding to the pseudo precursor mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to experience in a pseudo mode that a specific combination or the like is won in the normal game mode and the result is notified via the precursor mode and the continuous production.

Here, a counter for grasping the execution game of the continuous production and a counter for grasping the number of games during the continuous production is provided separately for the normal game mode and the specific mode. Therefore, for example, even if the mode is switched to the specific mode while the continuous effect is being executed in the normal game mode, when the mode is returned to the normal game mode again, the continuous effect in the normal game mode before the switch is in progress. It is possible to resume from.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90, for example, in the normal game mode, it is assumed that the mode is switched to the specific mode at the timing when the first continuous production game and the second continuous production game are exhausted. In this case, in the specific mode, the above-mentioned pseudo game can be performed regardless of the progress of the continuous production of the normal game mode up to that point and the subsequent result. Then, in the specific mode, when the pseudo display challenge mode or the like is won, the result is notified through continuous production. For example, when the mode is subsequently switched to the normal game mode, the continuous effect during digestion is resumed in the normal game mode. In this case, as a continuous production of the continuation of the first game and the second game that have been digested, the continuous production is restarted from the third game.

By doing so, when a continuous effect occurs in the normal game mode, for example, it is predicted that the winning notification in the attack mode will be performed after that, and the winning notification will be performed in any mode in the specific mode. It is possible to prepare for the transition of the game state after that, and then make it desired for the continuous production of the normal game mode.

Moreover, as described above, the continuous effect counter and the continuous effect counter for display start counting from the game before the continuous effect occurs as the precursor mode and the precursor mode for display. Therefore, for example, when a situation is such that continuous production can occur triggered by the winning of a specific combination, it is possible to perform preparations in the specific mode as described above before the start of continuous production. By doing so, it is not necessary to interrupt the continuous production in the middle, and the continuous production can be fully enjoyed from the beginning.

On the other hand, after the continuous production is the final game and an advantageous result or a non-advantageous result is notified, if any of the credit input switches 56 to 58 is operated, the winning notification effect is performed. (Process for mode transition notification in FIG. 35). In other words, after the above result is notified through continuous production in the 3-bet game, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated to play the 1-bet game, the winning notification effect in the 3-bet game is performed. However, after the above result is notified in the 1-bet game through continuous production, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to play the 3-bet game, the winning notification effect in the 1-bet game is performed. This is, for example, when a continuous effect occurs during a game in the normal game mode and the continuous effect continues until the final game, and when the above-mentioned advantageous result is notified, the following This is because it is conceivable to try to establish the first BB prize or the second BB prize by betting one card in the game. That is, in such a case, if the switching of the specific mode occurs based on one bet, the first BB or the second BB winning is notified through the continuous production, and the player's feelings are high. This is because there is a possibility that the screen for practice will be displayed and the feeling will be depressed, and the effect of the continuous production may be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the number of games to be produced in each of the normal game mode and the specific mode for the effect during the bonus. The effect during the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the bonus-in-time effect in the normal game mode and the bonus-in-time effect in the specific mode are both effects having the same number of games continuity. Specifically, the bonus medium production in the normal game mode is a video-style story production in which the story progresses for each game, and the story is completed in 24 games. Then, in each game, a story is assigned to each episode, and the story production of the one episode is unfolded over a predetermined period. The predetermined period is set longer than the shortest period (about 4.1 sec) required from the start of the game (operation of the start lever 41) to the completion of medal payout. In each game, when the game is digested in the shortest period and the start operation of the next game is performed immediately, each story effect being executed ends in the middle and the story effect corresponding to the next game is started.

In the bonus state based on the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode, the maximum number of payouts is set to 216. Then, in each game, one of the BB medium and small roles 1, the BB medium red 7 matching role, and the BB medium BAR matching role (IV = 28 to 30) is won, and any of the first small role to the 32nd small role wins. do. Regardless of which role wins, the privilege that can be obtained is 9 medals to be paid out, and the maximum number of payouts can be reached in 24 games.

That is, in the normal game mode, the bonus state is set to end in 24 games, which is a predetermined number of games, and the effect during the bonus is also set to end in 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, in the bonus state (special bonus state) based on the first PBB and the second PBB in the specific game mode, the maximum number of payouts is set to 24. Then, in each game, any of the special BB medium and small roles 1, the special BB medium and red 7 matching roles, and the special BB medium and BAR matching roles (IV = 78 to 80) is won, and any of the 1st P small role to the 32P small role. Kato wins a prize. Regardless of which role wins, one medal is paid out as a privilege to be obtained, and the maximum number of payouts is reached in 24 games.

That is, the bonus state in the specific mode is also set to end in 24 games, which is a predetermined number of games, as in the bonus state in the normal game mode. As the bonus-in-time effect in the specific mode, the same bonus-in-time effect as in the normal game mode is used, and the bonus-in-time effect is common to each number of games in the bonus state. The difference is that, as in the other effects, in the bonus medium effect in the specific mode, the stamp 65a indicating the specific mode exists in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is the normal game mode. It is added so that it exists on the front side with respect to the image data of the staging during the bonus in.

Further, in the bonus production, the number of remaining payouts to be paid out during the bonus is displayed and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. In the normal game mode, the remaining number of payouts is 216 as described above, and in the bonus middle production of the first game, as shown in FIG. 91 (b1), the display of the remaining number of payouts of 216 and 0 is displayed. The number of acquisitions is displayed. Then, in the bonus production during the second game, the display of the number of remaining payouts is reduced to 207 and the display of the number of acquisitions is increased to 9 in correspondence with the acquisition of 9 medals in the first game. .. This display is repeatedly updated in each game. For example, in the bonus middle production of the fifth game in FIG. 91 (b2), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 180, and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 36. Further, in the bonus middle production of the 23rd game of FIG. 91 (b3), the display of the number of remaining payouts is 18 and the display of the number of acquisitions is 196. Then, in the bonus middle production of the final game (24th game) of FIG. 91 (b4), the display of the number of remaining payouts is 9 and the display of the number of acquisitions is 207. When the payout is made in the final game, the number of remaining payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

Even during the bonus production in the specific mode, the number of remaining payouts to be paid out during the bonus is displayed and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. However, these displays in the specific mode are not the actual number of remaining payouts (upper limit payout number 24) or the actual number of acquisitions (upper limit acquisition number 24), but the remaining payout when replaced with the bonus state in the normal game mode. It is displayed as a number (upper limit payout number 216) or acquisition number (upper limit acquisition number 216).

For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (c1), as an effect during the bonus in the specific mode, in the first game, the number of remaining payouts of 216 cards is displayed and the number of cards acquired is displayed. The displayed number is the same as in FIG. 91 (b1), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a display different from the actual remaining 24 payout number and 0 acquisition number. .. And, in the production during the bonus of the second game, although one medal was won in the first game, nine medals are won in the normal game mode, so the display of the remaining payout number is reduced to 207. However, the display of the number of acquisitions will be increased to 9. This display is repeatedly updated in each game. For example, in the bonus middle production of the fifth game in FIG. 91 (c2), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 180, and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 36. The displayed number is the same as in FIG. 91 (b2), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a display different from the actual 20 remaining payout number and 4 acquisition number. .. Further, in the bonus middle production of the 23rd game of FIG. 91 (c3), the display of the number of remaining payouts is 18 and the display of the number of acquisitions is 196. The displayed number is the same as in FIG. 91 (b3), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a display different from the actual number of remaining payouts of 2 cards and the number of acquisitions of 22 cards. .. Then, in the bonus middle production of the final game (24th game) of FIG. 91 (c4), the display of the number of remaining payouts is 9 and the display of the number of acquisitions is 207. The displayed number is the same as in FIG. 91 (b4), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a display different from the actual remaining payout number of one sheet and the acquisition number of 23 sheets. .. When the payout is made in the final game, the number of remaining payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

As described above, by winning the first PBB and the second PBB and shifting to the special bonus, the bonus state in the normal game mode can also be simulated. Then, since the outcomes at the time of winning the first PBB and the second PBB are the same as the outcomes at the time of winning the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode, the transition to the bonus state is indicated for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. You can experience it in an easy-to-understand manner, and after shifting to the bonus state, the effects during the bonus state are also common, so you can enjoy the bonus in a specific mode as if it were a bonus in the normal game mode. ..

Furthermore, since the number of continuous games in the bonus state is the same and the production of each game in the bonus state is the same, data can be shared between the normal game mode and the specific mode, which is a great memory. The capacity can be reduced. In particular, the effect during the bonus state during the bonus state is in the form of a moving image by live action, and although the effect of increasing the attention of the bonus state is enormous, its storage capacity can be increased. In that respect, as described above, since the bonus medium effect in the specific mode is configured to divert the bonus medium effect in the normal game mode, the balance between the effect and the storage capacity can be well secured.

Not only that, the display of the remaining payout number and the acquisition number of the effect during the bonus is configured to use the display of the normal game mode instead of the actual display of the remaining payout number and the acquisition number in the specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to experience the fact that a medal can be obtained by winning a bonus and digesting the bonus even in a specific mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the case where the first PBB or the second PBB is won in the specific mode and the first PBB or the second PBB is not won, the so-called first PBB or the second PBB is carried over. The lottery table used for the lottery is different. Therefore, the lottery table used for the winning / failing determination in the carry-over state will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the carry-over state of the first PBB and the second PBB, the point values of the index values IV = 63 to 92, 95 to 99 are the same as those before the winning of the first PBB and the second PBB (FIG. 58). While it is a value, the point value of the index value IV = 50 to 62,93,94 is set to 0. In other words, when carrying over the 1st PBB and the 2nd PBB, the role of 1 out of place, special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2 Do not win. Therefore, when the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over, it may not be possible to win any of the roles, resulting in a loss. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event that the first PBB or the second PBB cannot be won even though the first PBB or the second PBB is won. That is, even at the time of carrying over, if the playability of paying out one bet and one bet for each game remains, the bonus cannot be won by the control that prioritizes the small winning combination over the bonus winning, and the game is missed. This is because it may be forced to play a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game that includes the result.

When the 1st BB and the 2nd BB won in the normal game mode are carried over, the lottery table for the normal game state (the duplicated combination of BB and the point value PV of BB are 0) is referred to in the 3-bet game, and the above is mentioned in the 1-bet game. The lottery table of FIG. 92 is referred to. Therefore, even if the first BB prize is aimed at by one bet at the time of carrying over the first BB or the like, it is possible to establish the first BB prize or the like without being disturbed by the one payout combination.

In the carry-over state, instead of using the lottery table provided with the above-mentioned deviation result, or in addition, in the carry-over state, the priority of drawing in the bonus prize is higher than that of the small winning combination. May be. That is, in a situation where both the bonus and the small winning combination are won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be performed so that the bonus winning is prioritized over the small winning combination winning. Even in this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the bonus cannot be won by winning the small role. Further, the control that prioritizes the bonus winning over the small winning combination is not limited to the time when the bonus is carried over, and may be performed even in the bonus winning game or the bonus non-winning state.

<Display of the number of continuous games and the number of acquisitions>
As described above, in the bonus state in the specific mode, the number of remaining medals is displayed and the number of medals won is displayed assuming that 9 medals have been paid out in each game. In the present embodiment, the display of the acquired number corresponding to the normal game mode is performed not only in the bonus state but also in the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display addition special zone.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a counting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The counting process is a process for counting the number of continuous games such as the attack mode and the display attack mode and the number of acquired games, and is activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle).

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the count condition is satisfied. The count condition is satisfied by the start of the attack mode or the start of the display attack mode. If the count condition is satisfied, the count flags corresponding to the game modes are set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S4002. The count flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count condition has already been satisfied. For example, when the count condition is satisfied in the normal game mode (when the attack mode is started), the count flag is a flag. , The count flag for the normal game mode is set, and when the count condition is satisfied in the specific mode (when the display attack mode is started), the count flag for the specific mode is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, or after the process of step S4002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether or not any of the count flags is set. If any of the count flags is set, the process proceeds to step S4004, and it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start command is received from the main control device 101. When the game is started, the process proceeds to step S4005, and it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. As described above, the specific mode flag is a flag indicating that the game mode is the specific mode, the state in which the flag is set is the specific mode, and the state in which the flag is not set is the normal game mode.

In the normal game mode, in step S4006, addition processing of game counters provided in various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, the game counter is incremented by 1. In the following step S4007, the subtraction process of the payout counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, the process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of bets (1 to 3) this time from the payout counter is performed.

When it is determined in step S4005 that the specific mode is set, in step S4008, the game counters for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b are added. Specifically, the game counter for the specific mode is added by 1. In the following step S4009, the subtraction process of the payout counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, instead of the number of bets (1) this time, a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the number of bets in the normal game mode (3 uniformly in this process) from the payout counter for the specific mode is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4004, or after the process of step S4007 or step S4009 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning result command is received from the main control device 101. When the game is finished, in step S4011, it is determined whether or not there was a payout in this game. In step S4011, it is determined that the payout has been made at the time of winning the replay.

If there is a payout, it is determined in step S4012 whether or not the specific mode flag is set. When the specific mode flag is not set and the normal game mode is set, the process of grasping the number of payouts is performed in step S4013. At the time of winning the replay, the number of payouts is grasped assuming that the same number of payouts as the number of bets have been paid out. Then, in step S4014, a process of adding the current number of payouts to the payout counter is performed.

When it is determined in step S4012 that the mode is the specific mode, the process of grasping the current winning mode is performed in step S4015, and the number of payouts in the normal game mode is grasped in step S4016 based on the winning mode. Perform processing. For example, as the winning mode this time, when the 1st P small winning combination (special bell) winning is established, the 1st P in the normal game mode is not the actual number of payouts based on the 1st P small winning combination winning. The number of payouts at the time of winning the first small winning combination corresponding to the small winning combination, which is nine, is grasped as a pseudo payout number. Further, for example, as the winning mode this time, when the 26P small winning combination (special watermelon) winning is established, the number is not one, which is the actual number of payouts based on the 26P small winning combination, but the first in the normal game mode. The number of payouts at the time of winning the 26th small win corresponding to the 26P small win is grasped as a pseudo payout number.

In step S4017, a process of adding the pseudo payout number grasped in step S4016 to the payout counter for the specific mode is performed. As a result, the payout counter for the specific mode becomes a value as if the payout was received in the normal game mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S4010 or step S4011, or after the process of step S4014 or step S4017 is executed, it is determined in step S4018 whether or not the count clear condition is satisfied. The count clear condition is satisfied by the end of the attack mode or the end of the display attack mode. If the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag corresponding to the game mode in which the count clear condition is satisfied is cleared in step S4019, and the corresponding game counter and payout counter are reset. Specifically, when the attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the normal game mode is cleared, and the game counter and the payout counter for the normal game mode are reset to 0. When the display attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the specific mode is cleared and the game counter and the payout counter for the specific mode are reset to 0.

If a negative determination is made in step S4003 or step S4018, or after the process of step S4019 is executed, the present count process is terminated.

In the normal game mode, for example, in the attack mode, as an effect during the attack mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), in an area that does not overlap with the push order notification effect on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. The total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the normal game mode is displayed, and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the value of the payout counter is displayed. In addition, the number of remaining games in the attack mode and VB mode is displayed in the area arranged side by side in the display area of the total number of games. Further, in the normal game mode, in the attack mode end effect setting process (step S2108 in the stop effect setting process of FIG. 46) and the VB mode end effect setting process (step S2112 in the stop effect setting process of FIG. 46). , The number of continuous games and the number of acquisitions are displayed with reference to the game counter and the payout counter for the normal game mode described above (FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b)).

In the specific mode, for example, in the display attack mode, even in the effect in the display attack mode, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is in an area that does not overlap with the push order notification effect. , The total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the specific mode is displayed, and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the value of the payout counter for the specific mode is displayed. In addition, the number of remaining games in the display attack mode and the display VB mode is displayed in the area arranged side by side in the display area of the total number of games. By doing so, for example, in the display attack mode, it is possible to experience in a simulated manner how many medals can be obtained in each game.

Further, the setting process of the end effect of the display attack mode (step S3415 in the game number management process for the specific mode in FIG. 75) and the setting process of the end effect of the display VB mode (game number management process for the specific mode in FIG. 75). In step S3422), the number of continuous games and the number of acquisitions are displayed with reference to the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode (FIG. 80 (b)) and FIG. 81 (b). That is, the display of the number of acquisitions in the specific mode is not the actual number of acquisitions (acquisition of one card for each game), but the number of acquisitions in which the number of payouts corresponding to the normal game mode is simulated. On the other hand, the number of continuous games is the actual number of games. As a result, it is possible to experience in a simulated manner how many games the attack mode and the like will be acquired if the attack mode continues.

<Switching between normal game mode and specific mode>
Next, as a process for switching the game mode, a specific mode switching process for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95. The specific mode switching process is a process of being started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 on the sub side in a situation where the game is stopped (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stop). be.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the second effect switch 67 as the changeover button has been operated. When the operation is performed, in step S4102, it is determined whether or not it is in any of the bonus states or the bonus carry-over state. In the case of a bonus state, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform a non-switchable effect in step S4103. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "mode switching NG" to notify that the normal game mode and the specific mode cannot be switched. .. After the processing of step S4103 is performed, the main switching processing is terminated as it is without performing the following mode switching processing.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is not possible to switch between the normal game mode and the specific mode in the bonus state or the carry-over state before winning, although the bonus is won. By doing so, not only the structure of the lottery table referred to at the time of carry-over, but also the switching between both modes is practically not performed, and the bonuses are duplicated and won (winning) in both game modes. The event that ends up is avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the specific mode flag is not set, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the normal game mode. In this case, in step S4105, the process of setting the specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4106, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the effect at the time of switching the specific mode. The effect at the time of switching the specific mode is as described above, and as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "free mode" and operates the second effect switch 67 again. Will teach you that you can return to the normal game mode. After setting the effect at the time of switching to the specific mode, the game content is stored in step S4107. Specifically, various flags and counters for the normal game mode are made non-rewritable (accessible), and various flags and counters for the specific mode are rewritable (accessible). Then, in step S4108, the specific mode setting process is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

When the specific mode flag is set in step S4104, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the specific mode. In this case, in step S4109, a process of clearing the specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4110, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the normal game mode switching effect. The normal game mode switching effect is as described above, and as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays “normal mode” and the second effect switch 67 again. It is taught that the specific mode can be returned by the operation.

After executing the process of step S4110, the game content is stored in step S4111. Specifically, various flags and counters for the specific mode are made non-rewritable (accessible), and various flags and counters for the normal game mode are rewritable (accessible).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after the process of step S4108 or step S4111 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If it is set, in step S4113, it is determined whether or not the game non-execution period has elapsed by a predetermined specific period (3 minutes) or more. During the game non-execution period, bets are not set, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not rotated, and medals are not paid out. During this game non-execution period, medals are paid out. Is completed, counting is started by a predetermined timer process. Then, for example, the timer processing count is reset on condition that any of various operation units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, and the credit input switches 56 to 58 is operated. Therefore, for example, after the medal payout of a predetermined game is completed, none of the operation units are operated, and when a specific period elapses, an affirmative determination is made in step S4113.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4113, it is determined in step S4114 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is present. If neither is the case, the process of clearing the specific mode flag is executed in step S4115, and the subsequent step S4116 sets the normal game mode switching effect.

That is, when the game non-execution period elapses in the specific mode, the mode is forcibly switched to the normal game mode on condition that the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is not set. As a result, for example, if a player who has practiced a game in a specific mode ends the game without switching to the normal game mode, the next seated player does not notice and plays the game in the specific mode as it is. It is suppressed.

After executing the process of step S4116, the game content storage process is executed in step S4117. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4111. After performing the process of step S4117, the present switching process is terminated.

If the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is in step S4114, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the bonus digestion instruction effect is performed in step S4118. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Please digest the bonus" and notifies that the bonus in the specific mode should be digested. After performing the process of step S4118, the present switching process is terminated.

For example, if the game is ended in the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state in the specific mode and the succeeding player tries to play the game in the normal game mode without noticing it, the non-switchable effect can be executed. In this case, there is a risk of being mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the above-mentioned bonus digestion instruction effect is a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of the misunderstanding.

<Specific mode setting process>
The specific mode setting process performed in step S4108 of the specific mode switching process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the switching effect period has elapsed. The switching effect period is a period for maintaining the state after performing the specific mode switching effect, and is set to, for example, about 4.1 sec (corresponding to the period required for digesting one game). As for such a period, the elapse of the period from the execution timing of the effect at the time of switching the specific mode is grasped by the predetermined timer processing.

When the switching effect period has elapsed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4202 so as to display the specific mode setting screen. On the specific mode setting screen, for example, the game content of the specific mode that was played last time is taken over and the game of the specific mode this time is performed, or the game content of the specific mode that was played last time is reset and the game of this specific mode is performed. Let them choose whether to carry out. For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), a button image indicating "continuation of the previous time" indicating that the game content is to be taken over, and a "reset" indicating that the game content is to be reset are displayed. The button image displayed as "Start" is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec), and a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing. When asked, the highlighted side can be selected.

After displaying the setting screen of step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not any of the above selections (selection of inheriting the game content or selection of resetting the game content) has been made. do. If no selection is made, the process proceeds to step S4204 to determine whether or not the start operation has been performed, that is, whether or not the start command from the main control unit 101 has been received. If the start command has not been received, the process returns to step S4203, and if the start command has been received, the game content is inherited and set in step S4205, and this setting process ends. In step S4205, a process of reading various flags and various counters for a specific mode made accessible in the process of step S4108 is performed. That is, if the start lever 41 is operated without making any selection, the previous game content is automatically taken over.

When it is determined in step S4203 that any of the selections has been made, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not the selection to take over the game content has been made. If it is selected to take over, the process proceeds to step S4205 to perform the takeover setting process, and then the present setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S4206 that the selection to reset the game content has been made instead of the selection to take over the game content, the game content reset processing in the specific mode is performed in step S4207. In such a process, a process of initializing various flags and various counters for a specific mode made accessible in the process of step S4108 is performed. As a result, the game content of the specific mode is set to the state when the power is turned on (normal mode for display).

In the following step S4208, a reset screen is displayed. As the reset screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), a display challenge indicating "free mode reset" indicating that the game content of the specific mode has been reset, and a display challenge as a state option to start after the reset. Supports "Challenge mode" option corresponding to the mode, "Attack mode" option corresponding to the display attack mode, "VB mode" option corresponding to the display VB mode, and an additional special zone for display. The option "From the specialized zone" and the option "From the beginning" corresponding to the normal mode for display are displayed. Further, on the reset screen, for example, the image of one of the options is highlighted, and the option to be highlighted is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

In step S4209, it is determined whether or not the selection operation of the option corresponding to the display challenge mode among the display of the above options has been performed. When the display challenge mode is selected, the process of setting the display challenge mode flag is performed in step S4210. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the display challenge mode.

In the following step S4211, a process of setting the display challenge mode start effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the display challenge mode (the selection operation of the display challenge mode is effective). In the display challenge mode start effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (b1), an image of the "decision button" and an image of the "back button" are displayed together with the display challenge mode start effect. Each button image is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

In the following step S4212, the process of starting the counting of the number of continuous games in the display challenge mode is performed.

When it is determined in step S4209 that the display challenge mode selection operation has not been performed, it is determined in step S4213 whether or not the option selection operation corresponding to the display attack mode has been performed. When the display attack mode is selected, the process of setting the display attack notification flag is performed in step S4214. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the state at the time of winning notification of the display attack mode.

In the following step S4215, a process of setting the display attack mode winning notification effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the game in which the winning notification of the display attack mode is performed (the selection operation of the display attack mode is effective). In the display attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (b2), an image of the "decision button" and an image of the "back button" are displayed together with the display attack mode winning notification effect. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

When it is determined in step S4213 that the display attack mode selection operation has not been performed, it is determined in step S4216 whether or not the selection operation of the option corresponding to the display VB mode has been performed. When the display VB mode is selected, in step S4217, a process of setting each flag of the display attack notification flag, the display attack mode flag, and the display VB notification flag is performed. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the state at the time of winning notification of the display VB mode.

In the following step S4218, a process of setting the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the game in which the winning notification of the display VB mode is performed (the selection operation of the display VB mode is effective). In the display VB mode winning notification effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (b3), an image of the "decision button" and an image of the "back button" are displayed together with the display VB mode winning notification effect. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

When it is determined in step S4216 that the selection operation of the display VB mode has not been performed, it is determined in step S4219 whether or not the selection operation of the option corresponding to the display special zone has been performed. When the display special zone is selected, in step S4220, the display attack notification flag, the display attack mode flag, the display VB notification flag, the display VB mode flag, and the display special zone flag are selected. Performs the process of setting. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the start game of the special zone for display.

In step S4221, a process of setting a display special zone start effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the start game of the display special zone (the selection operation of the display special zone is effective). In the display special zone start effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (b4), an image of the "decision button" and an image of the "back button" are displayed together with the display special zone start effect. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

After executing the processing of step S4212, step S4215, step S4218 or step S4222, or when a negative determination is made in step S4219, it is determined in step S4223 whether or not the determination operation has been performed. Specifically, a predetermined button operation (at the timing when the image of the "decision button" is highlighted among the images of the "decision button" and the image of the "back button" displayed in each effect image set above For example, it is determined whether or not the operation of the first effect switch 66) has been performed. Further, in step S4223, even when the option "from the beginning" corresponding to the normal display mode is selected from the options in FIG. 99 (a), a positive determination is made. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4223, the present setting process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made, the process returns to step S4209.

As described above, by making it possible to set the state at the start of the specific mode, it is possible to improve the versatility in the specific mode for practice. In other words, if the player can select which state he / she wants to practice (pseudo-experience) in a specific mode, he / she does not need to play the game that he / she already understands, and concentrates on the state he / she wants to practice or experience. You will be able to practice or experience it.

In this case, when the display attack mode or the display VB mode is selected, the winning notification effect is not set for the start of the display attack mode (start effect) or the start of the display VB mode (start effect). Was configured to be set. As a result, it becomes possible to experience that the attack mode is started after the third re-game prize, through the display attack mode being started after the third lip small winning combination prize. In addition, it is possible to experience that the VB mode is started after the 4th and 5th replay prizes, and the display VB mode is started after the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes. In other words, there is a sense of discomfort that the attack mode is started without going through the 3rd replay prize (without going through the 3rd Lip small role prize), and without going through the 4th and 5th replay prizes (4th). , It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity that the VB mode is started (without going through the 5th lip small winning combination prize).

On the other hand, when the display special zone is selected, the display special zone start effect is set (the configuration starts from the start game of the display special zone). This is a mode in which the special zone for display shifts when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, and the 7th lip small winning combination is established in the game, and the attack mode for display and the display are used. This is because the winning game and the starting game cannot be different as in the VB mode. By doing so, it is possible to start the special zone in a pseudo manner without going through the 7th re-game prize (without going through the 7th lip small role prize). In this case, for example, at the time of the display special zone start effect, the display "It is a mode started from the BAR alignment" may be displayed to explain the difference between the stop roll and the start mode. ..

<Modification 1>
In the present modification 1, the winning probability of various special combinations in the specific mode is different from the winning probability of the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. FIG. 100 is a lottery table in the specific mode in the first modification.

For example, the point value PV corresponding to the special specific combination having the index value IV = 63 to 77, 81 to 92 is set to be 10 times the point value PV (FIG. 17 or the like) in the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. As a result, the winning probability of the special specific combination is 10 times that of the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. By doing so, it is possible to experience that the transition lottery such as challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone, etc. is performed by the specific role winning, and the additional lottery is performed by the special special role winning. Therefore, it is possible to experience the transition lottery and the addition lottery with a higher probability than the transition lottery and the addition lottery in the normal game mode are performed. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that a transition lottery or an additional lottery will occur with a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode.

In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 100, in addition to the winning probability of the special specific combination, the winning probability of the first PBB and the second PBB is also different from the winning probability of the first BB and the second BB corresponding to the normal game mode. Specifically, it is configured to win with a probability of 10 times that of the normal game mode. As a result, it is possible to experience the bonus state with a higher probability than in the normal game mode, in other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the bonus winning will occur with a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode.

As described above, if the winning probability of a special specific role is increased, it is necessary to lower the winning probability of another role. In that respect, in the present modification 1, as shown in FIG. 100, the winning probabilities of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are the corresponding first promotion replays 1 to 1 in the normal game mode. The winning probability of other special replays (special fall replays 1 to 3, special BAR replays 1 and 2) is set to the same probability as the winning probability of 4 and the second promotion replays 1 and 2, but the other replays corresponding to the normal game mode. It is lower than the probability of. This avoids the inconvenience that the display attack mode and the display VB mode are not easily started even though the display attack mode and the display VB mode transition lottery is won based on the special specific combination winning. To do.

On the other hand, for special fall replays 1 to 3 and special BAR replays 1 and 2, even if the winning probability is low, the display attack mode and the display VB mode are configured to end by counting the number of games, so they end. There is no effect on the game, and even if you do the above, inconvenience is unlikely to occur.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the configuration regarding the setting of the bonus medium effect in the specific mode is different. In the bonus state (special bonus state) in the specific mode in this modification, a 3-bet game is possible in addition to the 1-bet game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), as a winning combination during the special bonus state, the benefits corresponding to the 30th P small winning combination prize to the 32nd P small winning combination winning are different depending on each betting game. That is, if the 30th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination is established in the 1-bet game, one medal payout equal to the number of bets is given as a privilege, and the 30th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game. If the 32P small winning combination is successful, the privilege is to pay out 3 medals, which is the same as the number of bets. By doing so, even if the special bonus state is exhausted in the 3-bet game, it is possible to prevent the medal from increasing or decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 101 (b), for example, when each game in the special bonus state is played in a 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out per game, and a total of 8 games are in the special bonus state. The maximum number of payouts will be reached. This makes it possible to shorten the digestion of special bonuses that require 24 games.

FIG. 102A shows a part of the continuous effect setting process for the specific mode in the second modification.

When it is determined in step S3904 in FIG. 89 that the continuous display effect flag is not set, it is determined in step S4301 whether or not the display bonus medium effect flag is set. Such a process is the same as the process of step S3914, and if it is not set, the present setting process is terminated as it is. When the display bonus middle effect flag is set, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. In the case of a 1-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, in step S4303, a process of subtracting 1 from the display bonus middle effect counter is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game, a process of subtracting 3 from the display bonus middle effect counter is performed in step S4304.

After executing the process of step S4303 or step S4304, the process proceeds to step S3916 in FIG. 89 to acquire the display bonus medium effect table, and then the bonus medium effect setting process corresponding to the value of the display bonus medium effect counter. And so on.

For example, when each game in the special bonus state is played in a 3-bet game, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the first game is a bonus effect during the special bonus state performed in the 3-bet game. The production data for the first game of the bonus production is acquired, the production data for the fourth game of the bonus production is acquired for the second game, and the production data for the seventh game of the bonus production is acquired for the third game. The production data is acquired by skipping three games. By doing so, even if the number of digested games in the special bonus state is shortened, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the production content of each game and the number of digested games.

<Modification 3>
In this modification 3, the PCB can be won during the special bonus. FIG. 103 is a lottery table in the special bonus in the present modification 3. The PCB (special CB) in this embodiment is a so-called single bonus (SB), and one JAC game is executed based on the PCB (SB) winning. In the JAC game, special CB small and medium-sized roles 1 to 4 with an index value IV = 96 to 97 are won with high probability.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the special bonus in this modification, the point value PV is allocated not only to the index value IV = 78 to 80 but also to the index value IV = 95, specifically, about 4 minutes. Wins when the index value IV = 95 with a probability of 1 (special CB wins).

FIG. 102 (b) shows a part of the end determination process in the present modification 3.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the PCB (SB) prize has been established, and if the PCB (SB) prize has been established, the process of setting the remaining payout number to 0 is performed in step S4402. When a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the process of step S4402 is executed, the processes after step S1501 in FIG. 40 are performed. Then, when the number of remaining payouts is set to 0 in step S4402, an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, and the process for ending the bonus is performed.

That is, it is possible to shorten the number of digestion games in the special bonus state by performing the present modification 3. As a result, it is possible to end the bonus state in which the medal does not increase or decrease at an early stage.

In the special bonus state, the probability of winning the PCB is not limited to the above, and may be higher or lower than the above. If the probability is high, the special bonus state can be terminated earlier, and if the probability is low, the deviation from the bonus during the normal game mode can be reduced.

In addition, for example, the above configuration may be combined with the modification 2 so that the PCB can be won in the 3-bet game in the special bonus state, and the PCB may not be won in the 1-bet game. When the special bonus state is digested in the 3-bet game, it can be considered that the player has made a decision to digest the special bonus state at an early stage, and the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode is used. This is because it is considered that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort even if a divergence occurs.

In the end determination process, the number of remaining payouts at the time of winning the PCB (SB) may be set to 1 or more, and the bonus may be terminated after the special CB state (the state in which one JAC game can be executed) is executed. In this case, the game in the special CB state is executed in the 2-bet mode together with the 2-bet mode in the normal game mode, and two medals are paid out based on the establishment of each winning combination in the special CB state. It is good to say. By doing so, it is possible to create a bonus state in which an increase in medals cannot be expected.

In the configuration where the bonus state is terminated after executing each game in the special CB state, for example, the number of remaining payouts at the time of PCB winning is set to 3, and each game in the special CB state is executed in the 2-bet mode. Two medals may be paid out as a privilege based on the establishment of each winning combination in the CB state, and an increase in one medal may be expected. At the time of winning the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB, the transition to the bonus state is performed, but the medals are not paid out. Therefore, if the player shifts to the bonus state in the specific mode, one medal will be reduced. In that respect, if the bonus state is configured so that an increase in one medal can be expected as described above, it is possible to eliminate the increase or decrease in medals by subtracting the decrease in one medal at the time of winning.

In addition, as a configuration in which the number of medals is increased during the bonus and the total is plus or minus zero with the decrease at the time of winning the bonus, a configuration that does not go through the PCB state may be used. The number of payouts is set to 2, and each game in the special bonus state is executed in the 1-bet mode, and the privilege based on the establishment of each winning combination in the special bonus state is set to 2 medals. Therefore, the configuration may be such that an increase in one medal can be expected.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification 4, the specific mode is set from the demo screen. The demo screen is a screen displayed when the effect switch (first effect switch 66) provided in the slot machine 10 is operated other than during game execution. As the demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), it corresponds to the option of "brightness setting" corresponding to adjusting the brightness of the screen and adjusting the volume output from the speaker 64. "Volume setting" option, "Free mode setting" option corresponding to setting a specific mode, "Mobile interlocking service" option corresponding to setting using a player's mobile terminal, etc. Etc. are displayed respectively. Further, on the demo screen, for example, the image of one of the options is highlighted, and the option to be highlighted is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Then, when the selection operation of the option "free mode setting" is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the free mode setting image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the free mode setting image, the option of whether to reset the game history of the specific mode is displayed as an image of the "YES button" corresponding to the reset and an image of the "NO button" not corresponding to the reset, respectively. The highlighting of the button image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

For example, when the image selection operation of the "YES button" is performed, the specific mode setting screen of FIG. 98 is displayed. The specific mode setting screen and the subsequent reset operation are as described above.

On the other hand, when the image selection operation of the "NO button" is performed, the configuration is such that the demo screen of FIG. 104 (a) is returned.

By doing so, the operability of the specific mode setting is improved. That is, it is possible to set the specific mode only by operating the first staging switch 66 without going through the operation of the second staging switch 67. As a result, for example, even if the second effect switch 67 is not always operable and can be operated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, it is possible to set a specific mode (initialization, etc.). Become.

<Modification 5>
In the present modification 5, the specific mode is set by the mobile interlocking service on the demo screen (FIG. 104 (a)) shown in the above modification 4.

When the option "mobile interlocking service" is selected on the demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 105A, the mobile interlocking service image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the mobile-linked service image, the choices of whether to use the service in the normal game mode or the service in the specific mode are selected from the "normal mode" image corresponding to the normal game mode and the specific mode. Images of "specific mode" that do not correspond to each other are displayed, and highlighting of each image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Information input / output processing related to the mobile interlocking service will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The information input / output process is started by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec) when the game is stopped.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the mobile interlocking service is selected on the demo screen. If the mobile interlocking service is not selected, this input / output process ends as it is. When the mobile interlocking service is selected, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4402 so as to display the mobile interlocking service image (FIG. 105 (a)).

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not the option selection operation for the normal game mode has been performed in the mobile interlocking service image. When the option selection operation for the normal game mode is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4404 so as to display the game information for the normal game mode. In the display of the game information for the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (b1), the game history in the normal game mode (number of bonus wins, number of challenge mode wins, number of attack mode wins, number of VB mode wins, special The number of winnings, the number of additions, the maximum number of additional games, the maximum number of continuous games in attack mode, the maximum number of acquisitions in attack mode, etc.) are displayed by QR code (registered trademark) or the like so that they can be acquired on a mobile terminal or the like. Further, in displaying the game information for the normal game mode, for example, a password input unit may be provided so that the password can be input by the operation of the player. The password is set according to, for example, the game history, and by inputting the password, the player can continue the previous game on the game machine.

In step S4405, it is determined whether or not the information has been input by the password or the like. When the information is input, in step S4406, as the process of updating the game information for the normal game mode, the process of rewriting the currently stored game history information into the game history according to the input password. I do. The password and the game history are stored in the ROM 182 of the display control device 81 in a one-to-one correspondence. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, or after the process of step S4406 is executed, this input / output process ends.

If it is determined in step S4403 that the selection operation of the option for the normal game mode has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, it is determined whether or not the selection operation of the option for the specific mode has been performed. When the selection operation of the option for the specific mode is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4408 so as to display the game information for the specific mode. In the display of the game information for the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (b2), the game history in the specific mode (number of special bonus wins, number of display challenge mode wins, number of display attack mode wins, display VB). QR so that the number of mode wins, the number of special zone wins for display, the number of additions, the maximum number of additional games, the maximum number of continuous games in the display attack mode, the maximum number of acquired attack modes for display, etc.) can be acquired on a mobile terminal or the like. Displayed by code (registered trademark), etc. Further, in the display of the game information for the specific mode, a password input unit is provided as in the display of the game information for the normal game mode, and the password can be input by the operation of the player.

In step S4409, it is determined whether or not the information has been input by the password or the like. When the information is input, in step S4410, as the game information update process for the specific mode, the process of rewriting the currently stored game history information to the game history according to the input password is performed. conduct. If a negative determination is made in step S4407 or step S4409, or after the process of step S4410 is executed, this input / output process ends.

As described above, by performing the present modification 5, for example, when the practice in the specific mode is stopped in the middle, the game table, the game hall, the game day, etc. are changed, and the practice is restarted from the middle again. It becomes possible to do.

<Modification 6>
In the present modification 6, in the normal game mode, when the number of continuous games in the second RT state or higher as the game state reaches a predetermined number of games, the normal game state is forcibly set. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section in the present modification 6. The advantageous section indicates a section of the game performed in a state where the gaming state is the second RT state or the third RT state. The advantageous section process is started by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the transition to the second RT state has occurred. Such a determination can be determined depending on whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the game number measurement flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4502.

When a negative determination is made in step S4501, or after the process of step S4502 is executed, it is determined in step S4503 whether or not the game number measurement flag is set. If it is not set, the processing for this advantageous section is terminated as it is. If it is set, the game number measurement process is executed in step S4504. In the game number measurement process, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of one game, and if it is the start timing, a process of adding 1 to the game number counter for the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e is performed.

In the following step S4505, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) based on the result of the measurement processing of the number of games. If the upper limit game has not been reached, the processing for this advantageous section is terminated. When the maximum number of games has been reached, the process of clearing the flags and counters for each display mode is performed in step S4506. By such processing, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. As a result, the push order notification is no longer performed, and the fall replay prize is established, so that the game state also shifts from the RT state to the normal game state. It should be noted that the RT setting flag may be cleared in step S4506 to forcibly shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state. After that, in step S4507, the forced termination command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the processing for this advantageous section is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the forced termination command performs processing (processing to reset various flags and various counters) corresponding to the forced setting of the display mode such as the attack mode to the normal mode, and is forced to perform the processing. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify that the reset has been made to. As a notification that the reset has been forcibly performed, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the content "The end upper limit has been reached. The normal game state is entered."

In this case, in the game number measurement process (step S4505), the addition process of the game number counter for the advantageous section is performed regardless of the bet number. Then, for example, if the practice is performed in the specific mode during the advantageous section, the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section is reduced by the number of games for which the specific mode is executed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108 (a), in the specific mode switching process in the present modification 6, when it is determined in step S4601 that the second effect switch 67 as the switching button is operated. , Step S4602 determines whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is obtained. The processing of step S4601 and step S4602 is the same as the processing of step S4101 and step S4102.

If it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is in progress, the non-switchable effect is set in step S4603, and then the specific mode switching process ends. The process of step S4603 is the same as the process of step S4103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is not in progress, in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the player is in the attack mode, the VB mode, or the special zone in the normal game mode. That is, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section. If it is determined in step S4604 that the section is in an advantageous section, the non-switchable effect is set in step S4603, and then the specific mode switching process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, the process proceeds to step S4104. The processing after step S4104 is as described above.

By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section in the normal game mode by executing the specific mode during the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In the present modification 7, in the above modification 6, it is possible to switch to the specific mode during the advantageous section, and at the same time, a warning is given at the time of switching.

For example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108 (b), the processes of steps S4701 to S4704 are performed in the same manner as in steps S4601 to S4604. If it is determined in step S4704 that the user is in the attack mode, the VB mode, or the special zone, the process proceeds to step S4705, unlike the above step S4604. It controls the display unit 65 and the like.

As a warning effect, as shown in FIG. 109, along with the indication "in the advantageous section" indicating that the advantageous section is in progress, "because the advantageous section is reduced, 3 sheets are recommended to be performed in the 3-bet game". Please return to your bet. " If a negative determination is made in step S4704 or after the processing of step S4705 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4104.

That is, the present modification 7 has a configuration in which the game mode can be switched even during the advantageous section and is left to the judgment of the player.

For example, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not only the digestion of the upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games) but also the acquisition of the upper limit acquisition number (for example, 3000 medals), and which continuation upper limit corresponds to the forced termination. If the forced termination effect is different depending on the situation, it is considered that some players wish to be forced to terminate by digesting the maximum number of games instead of acquiring the maximum number of acquired games. Therefore, as described above, if the specific mode can be executed by the player's will even during the advantageous section, it will be forcibly terminated by the digestion of the upper limit number of games based on the player's decision. It can be possible.

For example, when the game is forcibly terminated due to the exhaustion of the upper limit number of games, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested as the forced termination effect. In this case, after winning the attack mode in the normal game mode, the game mode is switched from the normal game mode to the specific mode, the game is executed up to the vicinity of the maximum number of games, and then the normal game mode is switched to the attack mode. Although the number of medals won in the game is small, the number of medals does not decrease during the specific mode, so it is possible to execute the forced termination effect without reducing the number of medals. By doing so, the game is to steadily win medals in the attack mode, and to execute the forced termination effect while selecting that the attack mode is not added. It is also possible to let a person choose.

<Modification 8>
In the present modification 8, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different, and the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different depending on the situation. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a MAX bet switching process relating to the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. The MAX bet switching process is started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101.

In step S4801, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the operation of one bet has occurred. When the single bet operation is performed, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the single bet mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The one-card bet mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify the number of medals to be inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is set in the situation where the one-card bet mode flag is set. When is operated, one virtual medal is inserted, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the one bet mode flag is not set, three virtual medals are inserted.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S4802 that the single bet mode flag is not set, that is, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed in a situation where the single bet mode flag is not set. In this case, in step S4803, a process of setting the number of inserted medals to one based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed. In the following step S4804, the one-card bet mode flag is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4802 that the single bet mode flag is set, that is, when the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed in the situation where the single bet mode flag is set, the step. In S4805, a process of setting the number of inserted medals to 3 based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed. In the following step S4806, the one-card bet mode flag is cleared.

After the processing of step S4804 or step S4806 is performed, the bet number switching command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4807. When it is determined in step S4801 that the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 has not been performed, or after the process of step S4807 is executed, the present switching process is terminated.

That is, in the present modification 8, the number of medals inserted is switched based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. By doing so, for example, when trying to play a game in a specific mode, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated once, the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 corresponds to the specific mode. In the specific mode, it is possible to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 instead of the second credit insertion switch 57 to play the game. In other words, although the number of bets differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode, the operation buttons at the time of inserting medals are common, and in the specific mode, the simulated experience of the normal game mode can be made more realistic. can.

For example, in the normal game mode, in the case of a configuration in which three bets are set as the specified number during the normal game state or the bonus state and two bets are set as the specified number during the CB state, the MAX bet is performed depending on which state. It is possible to make different numbers of virtual medals. On the other hand, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed only by the display control device 81, not via the main control device 101. Therefore, if the game mode is switched, the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX betting is also automatically switched (three virtual medals are inserted in the normal game mode, and one virtual medal is inserted in the specific mode). ), The operation information of the second effect switch 67 for switching the game mode may be output from the display control device 81 to the main control device 101, or the second effect switch 67 may be connected to the main control device 101. It will be necessary to do it. Then, the processing load of the main control device 101 may increase, and the information input to the main control device 101 increases, so that fraudulent acts are likely to occur and the fraudulent acts are prevented in advance. Not preferred. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to improve the operability of the game in the specific mode without increasing the information input to the main control device 101.

If the configuration is such that the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX betting is automatically switched by switching to the game mode, the second effect switch 67 is connected to the main control device 101 to switch the game mode. It suffices that this can be grasped by the main control device 101.

In the above modification 8, the second credit input switch 57 does not have to be provided with the same or substantially the same size as the first credit input switch 56, and is provided, for example, with the same or substantially the same size as the third credit input switch 58. May be. As a result, as the size of the second credit input switch 57 becomes smaller, the area where each credit input switch 56 to 58 is installed can be narrowed, and a place for installing other accessories (such as an effect button) can be secured. Is possible.

<Modification 9>
In the present modification 9, the configuration of the identification display indicating that the specific mode is in effect is different.

As shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B, in the present modification 9, the identification accessory 65b and the switching drive unit 65c for switching the position of the identification accessory 65b are provided. There is. The switching drive unit 65c is connected to the display control device 81, and the switching drive unit 65c is controlled by the CPU 181 so that the identification accessory 65b is set at a position that does not overlap the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-rear direction. It is displaced to a normal position (FIG. 111 (a)) and a specific position (FIG. 111 (b)) set at a position overlapping the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-rear direction.

When the game mode is set to the normal game mode, the CPU 181 drives and controls the switching drive unit 65c so as to arrange the identification accessory 65b at the normal position, and the game mode is set to the specific mode. The switching drive unit 65c is driven and controlled so that the identification accessory 65b is arranged at a specific position.

By doing so, it becomes easier to understand from the appearance whether or not the game mode is the specific mode, and each effect data of the normal game mode can be diverted as it is in the specific mode. As a result, it is not necessary to perform the process of incorporating the image data of the stamp 65a into the effect data of the normal game mode, and the processing load in the specific mode can be significantly reduced.

The normal position of the identification accessory 65b and the position where the switching drive unit 65c is provided are set on the back side of the upper lamp 63, for example, so that they cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine or are difficult to see. good. As a result, in the normal game mode, the identification accessory 65b and the switching drive unit 65c do not get in the way, and the game can be played without being particularly conscious of the specific mode.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the handling of the specific mode by the one-bet game is different from the first embodiment. Specifically, the specific mode by the 1-bet game in the present embodiment can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game mode by the 3-bet game.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the second credit insertion switch 57 in the first embodiment is formed to have the same or substantially the same size as the third credit insertion switch 58, and is arranged to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, the second effect switch 67 for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not provided.

A fourth credit input switch 69 is provided on the decorative panel 80 arranged below the portion where the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided. The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is for inserting one virtual medal. The fourth credit input switch 69 is connected to the main control device 101. More specifically, a fourth credit insertion detection sensor (not shown) that individually detects the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is connected to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104 of the main control device 101. When the operation of the 4 credit input switch 69 is performed, the detection signal from the 4th credit input detection sensor is output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. The CPU 102 determines that one virtual medal has been inserted based on the reception of the detection signal.

The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is a switch that can be pressed from the front side to the back side of the slot machine 10, and can be operated with other credit insertion switches 56 to 58 that can be pressed downward. The direction is different. Further, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is provided larger than the other credit insertion switches 56 to 58, and specifically, has an elliptical shape (major diameter of about 15 cm, minor diameter of about 8 cm) of the size of an adult's palm. ing. Therefore, it is an operation button that is easier for the player to catch the eye than the other credit insertion switches 56 to 58, and when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, the operation position and operation direction are different from the others. , It is easy to give the impression that a special operation is being performed.

FIG. 113 shows a lottery table for a specific mode in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, unlike the lottery table (FIG. 62) in the first embodiment, the point value PV is assigned to each of the index values IV = 51, 63 to 65, 68, 79, while the other index values. The point value PV of IV is set to 0. Therefore, index value IV = 51 (special replay), index value IV = 63 (special strong cherry), index value IV = 64 (special weak cherry), index value IV = 65 (special watermelon), index value IV = 68. (Special middle bell), index value IV = 79 (special red 7 matching combination) can be won, while other index values IV = 50, 52-62, 66-67, 69-78, 80-99 If not, you won't win. In the lottery table of the specific mode, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV = 0 to 49 in the lottery table of the specific mode, and the winning combination in the normal game mode is in the specific mode. Will not win. Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the player wins when the index value IV = 79 is in the special bonus state, but in the present embodiment, the player wins when the index value IV = 79 even in the normal gaming state. Can be. Therefore, the winning combination with the index value IV = 79 was referred to as "special red 7 matching combination" in the first embodiment, but is also simply referred to as "special red 7 matching combination" in this embodiment. And.

For each index value IV = 51, 63 to 65, 68, 79, substantially the same point value PV is set. In other words, in a game in a specific mode, there is a 1/6 chance of winning a special re-game, a 1/6 chance of winning a special strong cherry, and a 1/6 chance of winning a special weak. Win a cherry, win a special middle bell with a probability of about 1/6, and win a special red 7 match role with a probability of about 1/6.

The winning modes and benefits of the special re-game, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7 matching role are the same as in the first embodiment above, and all of them are the re-game winning and strong in the normal game mode. A prize is won by stopping at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, which is the same as the one that becomes the cherry prize, the weak cherry prize, the middle bell prize, and the red 7 matching combination prize. Further, the effective line set according to the number of bets is the same as that of the first embodiment.

The specific mode by the one-bet game in the present embodiment can be executed in a part of the case where the additional lottery for the number of continuous games in the attack mode is won.

<Overview of addition by specific mode>
The outline of the addition by the specific mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

In the normal game mode, if the display mode is equal to or higher than the attack mode and a specific role such as a watermelon, a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a middle bell, a chance eye A, or B is won, the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition to the display mode transition lottery according to the current display mode, an additional lottery for the attack mode is performed.

When the additional lottery is won, in this embodiment, the number of continuous games is added based on the number of additional games table according to the specific combination won in the additional lottery, and the winning combination is executed by executing the specific mode. Depending on the situation, the number of continuous games may be added. In the following description, the addition performed at the table according to the specific combination won in the addition lottery is referred to as a normal addition, and the addition according to the winning combination by executing the specific mode is referred to as a special addition.

In the normal addition, the number of games corresponding to the specific combination won in the additional lottery is added after the game in which the specific combination is won or the bonus is completed, and the number of additional games is notified by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. It is executed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, in the special addition, first, a special bet instruction effect for prompting the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In the special bet instruction effect, for example, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is referred to as a "dodeca button", and the display "press the dodeca button !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the special bet instruction effect is used. A sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64. As the sound effect, for example, it is set as a sound that the player can clearly recognize that an operation different from the normal betting operation should be performed by emitting "Zubababababan !!" with a loud electronic sound.

After the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is performed after the special bet instruction effect, the special start instruction effect for prompting the operation of the start lever 41 is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In the special start instruction effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the message "Put your spirit and hit the lever !!". When the start operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed based on the special start operation instruction effect, the sound effect for the special start operation instruction effect is emitted from the speaker 64. As the sound effect, for example, a start operation is performed in which a low electronic sound emits "Dun" and has an effect different from that of a normal start operation (in a normal start operation, for example, a high electronic sound "Tun"). This is set as a sound that enables the player to grasp the fact and prompts a calm stop operation so as to expect the content of the subsequent game.

One medal is inserted based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. Then, when the start lever 41 is operated in the situation where the one-card bet is made, the game is started as a game of the one-bet game, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. In the one-bet game, as described above, one of the special replay, the special strong cherry, the special weak cherry, the special middle bell, and the special red 7 matching combination is won.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, one of the above-mentioned special winning combinations won is won. The figure shows, for example, that a special watermelon prize has been established. In the special addition, the number of additional games this time is determined based on the winning special watermelon, and the additional effect corresponding to the determined number of games is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

In the special addition via the game in the specific mode, the addition of a large number of games is more likely to occur than the normal addition without the game in the specific mode. Therefore, when a specific combination is won and an addition occurs, the player expects that a special addition will occur.

<Processing for special addition>
Hereinafter, the processing when the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing in the present embodiment. As described above, the second specific combination process is a process performed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 33).

That is, when a negative determination is made in step S911 in the flowchart of FIG. 33, or after the process of step S913 is executed (after the process for promotion of the attack mode is executed), the process proceeds to step S4901 shown in FIG. 115. In step S4901, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in the same manner as the process in step S914.

In the following step S4902, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S4901. If it is not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is won, the process proceeds to step S4903, and whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, that is, if the winning combination with the bonus is won as the current specific winning combination, or the winning during the bonus carry-over state is specified. Determine if it is a role. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S916.

If the bonus winning flag is not set, the special addition lottery process is executed in step S4904. In the special addition lottery process, the special addition generation table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and the lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e. In the special addition generation table, the probability of occurrence of the special addition differs depending on the type of the specific combination won in the addition lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116, the pattern is set so that the higher the winning probability of each specific combination is, the lower the probability of occurrence of the special addition is set, and the higher the winning probability of the specific combination is, the special addition is made. There is a pattern that is set so that the probability of occurrence is high. For example, the probability of winning a watermelon is about 1/144 (including watermelon duplications 1 and 2, FIG. 17, etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is about 1/128 (including strong cherry duplications 1 and 2, FIG. 17 mag), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is lower than the probability of winning a watermelon. Further, in the special addition generation table, the special addition is more likely to occur when the addition is based on the strong cherry winning than when the addition is based on the watermelon winning.

On the other hand, the probability of winning a weak cherry is about 1/169 (including 1 and 2 overlapping weak cherries, FIG. 17, etc.), and the probability of winning a watermelon is higher than the probability of winning a weak cherry. In the special addition generation table, the special addition is more likely to occur when the addition is based on the watermelon winning than when the addition is based on the weak cherry winning.

That is, in the special addition generation table, the occurrence probability of the special addition is set regardless of the relationship between the high and low of the winning probability of the specific combination in the normal game mode.

In step S4905, it is determined whether or not the special addition is won based on the processing result of step S4904. In the case of non-winning, in steps S4906 to S4908, the same processing as in steps S917 to S919 is performed, and then the second specific combination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the special addition is won, in step S4909, a process of adding 1 to the addition counters of various counter areas 106e is performed. In the following step S4910, a process of setting a special addition flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The addition counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of occurrences of the special addition, and the special addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the special addition should be executed.

In the following step S4911, a special addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special addition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the special addition should be generated in the next game, that is, that the next game should be executed in the specific mode. The display control device 81 that has received the special addition command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to execute the above-mentioned special bet instruction effect as the effect at the end of the game this time.

The case where it is determined in step S4903 that the bonus winning flag is set is the case where the addition this time is carried over after the end of the bonus, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, the special addition lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S4904. Then, in step S4913, it is determined whether or not the special addition is won, and if it is not won, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S4914. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S920. If the special addition is won in step S4913, the process of adding 1 to the addition counter is performed in step S4915.

After executing the processing of step S4908, step S4911, step S4914 or step S4915, the second specific combination processing is terminated.

The third specific combination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117. As described above, the third specific combination process is a process performed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 34).

In step S5001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. Such processing is the same as in step S1001. In step S5002, it is determined whether or not the additional winning is achieved based on the processing result of step S5001. If it is not won, the third specific combination process is terminated as it is. If the winner is selected, the same processing as in steps S4903 to S4915 is performed in steps S5003 to S5015. That is, for example, the special addition lottery process is performed in step S5005 or step S5012, and if the special addition lottery is not won, the normal addition process is performed, and if the special addition lottery is won, the special addition lottery is performed. Perform processing.

Next, the end determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118. As described above, the end determination process is a process performed as one process of the bonus state process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 40).

FIG. 118 shows a process when a negative determination is made in step S1511 in FIG. 40. That is, if the number of remaining payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES) and each winning flag of the attack mode winning flag, the challenge mode winning flag, and the VB mode winning flag is not set at the end of the bonus, the attack is performed in step S5101. It is determined whether or not the mode addition winning flag is set. If it is set, in steps S5102 to S5204, the process for normal addition is normally performed in the same manner as in steps S1513 to S1515.

When it is determined in step S5101 that the attack mode addition flag is not set, it is determined in step S5105 whether or not the addition counter is 0. As described above, when the special addition is performed after the bonus is completed, the addition counter is added (step S4915, step S5015). If it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1516, and the addition process in the challenge mode is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is not 0, the special addition process is performed in step S5106 and step S5107 in the same manner as in steps S4910 and S4911. After executing the process of step S5104 or step S5107, the end determination process is terminated.

Next, the special zone processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119. As described above, the special zone processing is a processing performed as one of the lottery result handling processing in the main control device 101 (FIG. 41).

In step S5201, as in step S1601, a process of grasping the lottery result of this game is performed. In the following step S5202, the special addition lottery process is executed in the same manner as the process of step S4904 and the like. In the lottery process of step S5202, the probability of occurrence of the special addition in the other lottery process may be different, and specifically, the special addition may be more likely to occur than in the other lottery process.

In step S5203, it is determined whether or not the special addition is won based on the processing result of step S5202. In the case of non-winning, in steps S5204 to S5206, a normal addition process is performed in the same manner as in steps S1602 to S1604. On the other hand, if the special addition is won in step S5203, the special addition process is performed in steps S5207 to S5209 in the same manner as in steps S4909 to S4911. After executing the process of step S5206 or step S5209, the process for the special zone is terminated.

Next, the process for dealing with the lottery result at the time of special addition will be described.

FIG. 120 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result correspondence process in this embodiment. As described above, the lottery result correspondence process is a process performed as one process of the lottery process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 31).

In the present embodiment, first, in step S5301, the bet number of this game is determined. If the number of bets is not one bet corresponding to the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S701, and the process for the normal game mode is performed. On the other hand, if the game this time is a single bet, in step S5302, the lottery result corresponding process for the specific mode is executed, and then the corresponding process is terminated.

FIG. 120 (b) is a flowchart showing a lottery result correspondence process for a specific mode.

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. That is, also in this embodiment, the one-bet game can be played in a mode other than the specific mode, and in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the game was played in the specific mode. If it is not in the specific mode, this corresponding process is terminated as it is.

In the case of the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S5402, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a special watermelon winning. If the special watermelon is won, in step S5403, a process of acquiring the special watermelon table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 121 (a1) shows a special watermelon table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a special watermelon, and FIG. 121 (b1) shows a watermelon table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a watermelon. As shown in FIGS. 121 (a1) and 121 (b1), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special watermelon is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the special watermelon is won. The number of games selected at the time of winning is larger than that at the time of winning the watermelon.

If a negative determination is made in step S5402, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special strong cherry winning. If the special strong cherry is won, in step S5405, a process of acquiring the special strong cherry table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 121 (a2) shows a special strong cherry table selected as an additional table when a special strong cherry is won, and FIG. 121 (b2) shows a strong cherry table selected as an additional table when a strong cherry is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 121 (a2) and 121 (b2), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special strong cherry is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the strong cherry is won. The number of games selected when the special strong cherry is won is larger than when the strong cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special weak cherry winning. If the special weak cherry is won, in step S5407, a process of acquiring the special weak cherry table as the additional table of this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 121 (a3) shows a special weak cherry table selected as an additional table when a special weak cherry is won, and FIG. 121 (b3) shows a weak cherry table selected as an additional table when a weak cherry is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 121 (a3) and 121 (b3), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special weak cherry is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the weak cherry is won. The number of games selected when the special weak cherry is won is larger than when the weak cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special middle bell winning. If the special middle bell is won, in step S5409, a process of acquiring the special middle bell table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 121 (a4) shows a special middle bell table selected as an additional table when the special middle bell is won, and FIG. 121 (b4) shows a middle bell table selected as an additional table when the middle bell is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 121 (a4) and 121 (b4), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special middle bell is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the middle bell is won. When the special middle bell is won, a larger number of games is selected than when the middle bell is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5408, it is determined in step S5410 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special replay winning. If the special replay is won, in step S5411, a process of acquiring the special replay table as the additional table of this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 121 (a5) shows a special replay table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a special replay, and FIG. 121 (b5) shows a replay table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a replay. Unlike other special specific roles, in the normal game mode, no addition occurs when the replay is won during the attack mode. The case where it is added at the time of winning the replay is only in the special zone, and the replay table shows the table for the special zone. As shown in FIGS. 121 (a5) and 121 (b5), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special replay is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the replay is won in the special zone. Therefore, the number of games selected when the special replay is won is larger than when the replay is won in the special zone. That is, even when compared with the winning combination added in the special zone, the number of games added when the special winning combination is won occurs. In addition, even in the additional table in the special zone in other specific roles, the number of additional games at the time of winning the special specific role is the corresponding specific in the special zone as compared with the additional table at the time of winning the special specific role. It is more than the number of additional games at the time of winning the role.

When a negative determination is made in step S5410, it means that the lottery result of the specific mode this time is the winning of the special red 7 matching combination. In this case, in step S5412, a process of acquiring the special red 7 matching combination table as the additional table of this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 121 (a6) shows a special red 7-matched table selected as an additional table when the special red 7 is aligned, and FIG. 121 (b6) shows a red 7-matched table selected as an additional table when the red 7 is aligned. Shows. Unlike other special special roles, in the normal game mode, the red 7 match occurs only during the bonus. The red 7-matched table shows the table in the bonus. As shown in FIGS. 121 (a6) and 121 (b6), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special red 7 is aligned is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the red 7 is aligned in the bonus. Therefore, the number of games selected when the special red 7 is aligned is larger than the number of games when the red 7 is aligned in the bonus.

After executing the processes of step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411 or step S5412, in step S5413, the process of adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. In such a process, the number of additional games at the time of the special addition determined by referring to the table acquired in each of the above processes and the lottery counter is added to the number of continuous games in the attack mode being executed.

After that, in step S5414, a process of setting the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this corresponding process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the addition command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate the addition effect corresponding to the end of the current game (when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special addition effect is different from the number of additional games in each specific combination by using each special specific combination corresponding to each specific combination in which the attack mode can be added. I do. As shown in the first embodiment, each specific combination and each special specific combination have different combinations, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have the same apparent stop result.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a watermelon role, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel. Winning the role of watermelon is established. Then, an additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the role of watermelon may occur. On the other hand, in the case of a special watermelon role, when the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower row of the right reel, the right reel The "red bell" symbol will stop in the middle row, and the special watermelon role prize will be established. In this case, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the bottom of the right reel, and the appearance of the special watermelon winning prize is the same as that of the watermelon winning prize. Then, an additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the special watermelon role may occur. Therefore, from the stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the situation where the addition occurs, it is possible to make the player think that the addition effect corresponding to the special watermelon role is generated by the watermelon role. can. By doing so, it is possible to show the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the special specific role such as the special watermelon role as a kind of the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the specific role such as the watermelon role.

Here, as a kind of additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role such as a watermelon role, a configuration is also conceivable in which a special additional effect such as the above-mentioned special watermelon role in which the number of games is added is set. However, if this is done, the addition effect corresponding to the specific combination winning may be complicated, and the specific combination winning is a condition for the special addition. Therefore, depending on the winning probability of the specific combination, the special addition may be added. There may be inconveniences such as not being able to win a specific role even though you want to generate it. On the other hand, if the winning probability of a specific winning combination is increased too much, inconveniences such as a ball output rate may occur. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the specific combination and the special specific combination are set as different combinations, each combination is associated with the additional effect, and only the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the specific combination becomes complicated. By adjusting the winning rate of each winning combination, it is possible to appropriately generate an additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific combination and the special additional effect described above.

Moreover, both the specific combination and the special specific combination can occur without the transition of the gaming state due to, for example, winning a bonus. Specifically, if a game is played in the normal game mode of a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game in a normal game state, a specific role can be won, and if a game is played in a specific mode of a 1-bet game, a special specific role can be won. You can win. That is, these specific winning combinations and special specific winning combinations can be won by simply changing the number of bets in the same gaming state without going through the transition of the gaming state. Then, which role was won / won cannot be identified depending on the gaming state.

And, as described above, which combination is won / won differs depending on the number of bets, so if you want to generate the above-mentioned special additional effect by a special specific combination, you can easily generate it by simply switching the number of bets. It is possible to make it. By doing so, it is possible to generate the above-mentioned special addition effect at the timing as designed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the commonality of the stop rolls, various measures are taken to reduce the distinctiveness between the specific combination and the special specific combination. Each will be described below.

<Structure that reduces the distinctiveness between special specific roles and specific roles>
As mentioned above, the special special role including the special replay and the special red 7 set and the corresponding specific role have the same stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning, and any role wins the prize. It's hard to tell if you're doing it. In the present embodiment, in addition to the commonality regarding the stop roll, the present embodiment has a configuration for reducing the distinctiveness between these special specific combinations and the specific combinations.

<Commonality of staging at the time of betting>
As a configuration for reducing the distinctiveness between the special specific combination and the specific combination, first, the commonality of the betting effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 122, at the time of betting in the normal game mode, including the normal addition, for example, as a situation before betting, if the attack mode is in progress, the auxiliary display unit 65 acquires the bet during the current attack mode. The total number of acquisitions is displayed as "number of get" (the figure shows that 54 cards have been acquired). In addition, the number of cards paid out after winning the prize in the previous game is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 (the figure shows that nine cards were paid out in the previous game). The credit display unit 60 displays the number of virtual medals that are currently credited (in the figure, it is shown that the maximum number of 50 virtual medals is credited).

In the above pre-bet situation, for example, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated and three bets are made, the display of the total number of bets obtained by the auxiliary display unit 65 corresponds to the number of bets this time. Specifically, it is updated to the display of the total number of acquired cards, which is reduced by three. Further, the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off to indicate that the next game can be started based on the bet operation. Then, the credit display unit 60 is updated from the display of the number of credits before betting to the display of the number of credits obtained by reducing the number of bets this time.

In addition, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect (sound effect when betting three sheets) corresponding to the betting operation this time. For example, in the sound effect at the time of three bets, "bebe" is emitted three times in correspondence with the number of bets. It should be noted that the sound effect at the time of one bet is emitted as "be", and the sound effect at the time of two bets is emitted as "bebe". These bet sound effects may be other sound effects as long as the number of bets can be identified by the player.

As an effect at the time of betting operation at the time of special addition, for example, as a situation before betting, when the above special bet instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the number of each game in the attack mode is displayed and the total number of acquisitions is displayed. The display will not be performed. Further, at the timing when the special bet instruction effect is started, the display of the payout number display unit 62 and the display of the credit display unit 60 are turned off.

Then, in this situation, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated according to the instruction of the special bet instruction effect and one bet is made, the auxiliary display unit 65 starts from the special bet instruction effect to the special start instruction effect. The screen switches to. Even in the special start instruction effect, the number of each game in the attack mode and the total number of acquisitions are not displayed. Therefore, the display of the total number of winnings is not updated based on the main betting operation as in the case of normal betting. Further, as described above, the credit display unit 60 is turned off. Therefore, the display of the number of credits in the credit display unit 60 based on the bet operation this time is not updated.

In addition, although the betting operation this time corresponds to a one-sheet bet, the speaker 64 emits a three-sheet bet sound effect corresponding to the three-sheet bet. That is, normally, "be" is emitted once as a 1-card bet sound effect corresponding to a 1-card bet, but in the 1-card bet at the special bet, it is a 3-card bet sound effect. "Bebebe" and "Bebe" are fired three times.

<Processing for bet operation>
The process for performing each of the above effects will be described.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a bet operation process. The bet operation process is performed as one process in the in / out counter process for the number of bets in step S109 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) in the main control device 101. The bet operation process is started at the timing when the bet operation becomes possible (all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the medal payout is completed) in the in / out counter processing of the number of bets.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. When the special addition flag is set, it indicates that the game to be started next is a game for performing special addition. In this case, in step S5502, the special operation instruction command is output to the display control device 81. set. The display control device 81 that has received the special operation instruction command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate the special operation instruction effect based on the end of the game in which the special addition flag is set. In the following step S5503, the credit display invisible process is executed. Specifically, the display of the credit display unit 60 and the payout number display unit 62 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, or after the process of step S5503 is executed, it is determined in step S5504 whether or not any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69 has been operated, and the operation is performed. Wait until. Based on that any of the operations has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5505.

In step S5505, it is determined whether or not the operation this time is the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. If the operation is the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the three-card bet process is executed in step S5506. Such a process is a process for effectively betting three virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than three, the bet operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to, for example, step S5504.

When three virtual medals are effectively bet, the process of subtracting 3 corresponding to the number of bets this time is performed from the credit counter in step S5507. In this case, the display of the credit display unit 60 is updated to the value subtracted by 3. When the display of the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5508, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the three-sheet bet sound effect (bebebe) is emitted, and then the bet operation process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5505 that the operation is not the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, it is determined in step S5509 whether or not the operation is the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58. If the operation is the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, the double bet process is executed in step S5510. Such a process is a process for effectively betting two virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than two, the bet operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to, for example, step S5504.

When two virtual medals are effectively bet, the process of subtracting 2 corresponding to the number of bets this time is performed from the credit counter in step S5511. In this case, the display of the credit display unit 60 is updated to the value subtracted by 2. When the display of the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5512, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the sound effect (bebe) at the time of double betting is emitted, and then the betting operation processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step S5509 that the operation is not the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, it is determined in step S5513 whether or not the operation is the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. If the operation is the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, the one-card bet process is executed in step S5514. Such a process is a process for effectively betting one virtual medal according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than one (0), the bet operation is not valid. do. In this case, the process returns to, for example, step S5504.

When one virtual medal is effectively bet, the process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the number of bets this time is performed from the credit counter in step S5515. In this case, the display of the credit display unit 60 is updated to the value subtracted by 1. When the display of the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the one-sheet bet sound effect (B) is emitted, and then the bet operation process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S5513 that the operation is not the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, it means that the operation of the credit insertion switch this time is the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In this case, the one-card bet process is executed in step S5517. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S5514. In the following step S5518, similarly to the process of step S5515, a process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the number of bets this time is performed from the credit counter.

In step S5519, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is not set, in step S5520, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the sound effect (be) at the time of one bet is emitted in the same manner as the process of step S5516, and then the bet operation process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5519 that the special addition flag is set, the speaker 64 is controlled in step S5521 so that a three-sheet bet sound effect (bebebe) is emitted. Then, in step S5522, the special start instruction command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the bet operation process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the special start instruction command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate the special start instruction effect.

As described above, when the special addition flag is set and the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, the sound effect at the time of three bets is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to make the specific mode of this 1-bet game seem as if it were a 3-bet game.

Moreover, in the game started with the special addition flag set, the display of the credit display unit 60 is turned off. Therefore, only the credit counter is subtracted at the time of betting, and the credit display unit 60 is not updated. As a result, it is avoided that it becomes possible to clearly identify whether the bet is a single bet or a three bet just by looking at the credit display unit 60.

When the display of the credit display unit 60 is turned off, the display of the payout number display unit 62 is also turned off. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness as compared with the configuration in which only the display of the credit display unit 60 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to special operation effects and the like.

Even when the special addition flag is set, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated instead of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, the processing for one bet is performed and the bet is bet. The hour sound effect is configured to set the one-sheet bet sound effect corresponding to the one-sheet bet. This is because, in a situation where such a special addition is performed, a player who operates the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 makes a bet by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69. This is because it is considered that they are aware of what they are doing. Therefore, a sound effect at the time of one-sheet betting is set, and the configuration is such that it is confirmed that the one-sheet bet has been effectively performed.

In each game, betting may be made by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 in addition to operating the credit insertion switch. Although the description of the process in this case will be omitted, one bet sound effect (be) is emitted for each medal inserted regardless of the presence or absence of the special addition flag.

By the way, the case where the special addition flag is set is the case where a specific winning combination (winning) has occurred in the previous game, and at least three medals have been paid out. Then, in a game in which a special addition is performed, the situation where the credit counter is 0 is unlikely to occur normally, and the bet operation can be performed by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 without inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45. It has become. The situation where the credit counter is 0 is a case where the settlement switch 59 is operated before the game in which the special addition is performed, and the player who performs such an action is operated by the second credit insertion switch 57. It is highly possible that one bet is made by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69, as in the situation where the bet is made.

<Commonality of staging at the time of winning>
Next, as a configuration for reducing the distinctiveness between the special specific role and the specific role, the commonality of the winning effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 124, when a normal addition occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the watermelon winning is established, the position corresponding to these "watermelon" symbols is established. By irradiating the reel with a predetermined light emitting part, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout appearance. The flash effect can be realized by controlling an existing light emitting unit or the like. When the watermelon prize is established, five medals will be paid out as a privilege corresponding to the watermelon prize. In this case, as the medal payout sound effect, a watermelon payout sound effect (for example, "dodddd" in the bass) is emitted from the speaker 64. Then, an additional effect of the number of games is generated based on the watermelon table at the time of winning the watermelon.

On the other hand, when a special addition occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "red bell" symbol are stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the special watermelon winning is established, these Instead of each symbol (watermelon, watermelon, red bell) corresponding to the special watermelon, the reel at the position corresponding to the "watermelon" symbol is irradiated with the predetermined light emitting part, and the flash effect as the above-mentioned watermelon payout appearance occurs. do. That is, although it is a special watermelon prize, at the time of special addition, the above-mentioned watermelon payout appearance, which is an effect generated at the time of the watermelon prize, occurs. When the special watermelon prize is established, one medal will be paid out as a privilege corresponding to the special watermelon prize. In this case, the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64 as the medal payout sound effect. That is, although it is a special watermelon prize and the number of medals paid out is one, a watermelon payout sound effect is generated as a medal payout sound effect at the time of special addition. Then, an additional effect of the number of games is generated based on the special watermelon table at the time of winning the special watermelon.

<Payout judgment processing>
The process for performing each of the above effects will be described.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a payout determination process in the present embodiment. As described above, the payout determination process is a process performed as one process (step S413) of the reel control process (FIG. 18) in the main control device 101.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not payout can occur as a result of this winning. If a payout may occur, the payout process is performed in step S5602, and then the payout determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5601 that the payout does not occur, it is determined in step S5603 whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the re-game processing is performed in step S5604, and then the final payout determination processing is terminated.

Hereinafter, the payout process and the replay process will be described.

<Payout processing>
In the payout process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 126, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is not set and the game played this time is not a game corresponding to the special addition, the payout setting for the normal game mode is performed in steps S5702 to S5705. On the other hand, if the special addition flag is set and the game played this time is a game corresponding to the special addition, the payout setting for the specific mode is performed in steps S5706 to S5728.

As a payout setting for the normal game mode, first, in step S5702, the payout number is grasped. In such a process, the number of bets this time and the winning mode are specified, and the number of payouts corresponding to the specified number of bets and the winning mode is grasped. For example, if the number of bets this time is three and the bell (first small role) prize is established, it is understood that nine medals will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is three and the watermelon (26th small role, etc.) prize is established, it is understood that five medals will be paid out. Also, if the number of bets this time is 3, a strong cherry (25th small role, etc.) prize, a weak cherry (18th small role, etc.) prize, and a middle bell (29th small role, etc.) are established. Know that three medals will be paid out. Then, it is understood that if the number of bets this time is 3 in the bonus and the red 7 match (30th small role) winning is established, 9 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the number of bets this time is one and the special bell (1st P small role) prize is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is one and the special watermelon (26th P small role, etc.) prize is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. In addition, the number of bets this time is one, and a special strong cherry (25P small role, etc.) prize, a special weak cherry (18P small role, etc.) prize, and a special middle bell (29P small role, etc.) have been established. If so, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is one and the special red 7 match (30th P small role) prize is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out.

After processing in step S5702, in step S5703, a payout process for paying out the number of medals grasped in step S5702 is executed. Specifically, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the medals of the grasped number of payouts are paid out. In this case, the number of payouts is added to the credit counter, and the hopper device 51 is controlled so that medals that exceed the upper limit of the credit counter are paid out. That is, even if the number of payouts is added to the credit counter, if it is equal to or less than the upper limit of the credit counter, the medal is not paid out from the hopper device 51.

In the following step S5704, a payout sound effect corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if the watermelon (26th small role) prize is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted. Further, if the special watermelon (26th P small winning combination) prize is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the special watermelon is emitted. The payout sound effect for watermelon and the payout sound effect for special watermelon are set to different sounds to the extent that the player can identify them. For example, the payout sound effect for watermelon is set to the above-mentioned low-pitched sound. , The special watermelon payout sound is set to a low-pitched sound that is shorter than the watermelon payout sound effect. It should be noted that the payout sound effects of other specific roles and the payout sound effects of the special specific role are also set to be different to the extent that the player can identify them. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether or not the medal is paid out from the hopper device 51. That is, the payout sound effect is set even when the number of payouts is only added to the credit counter.

In the following step S5705, the payout appearance corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th small role) prize is established, a flash effect as a watermelon payout appearance is generated. Further, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 5 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 corresponding to the above-mentioned five medal payouts as the payout appearance for watermelon. If the special watermelon (26th P small role) prize is established, a light-emitting part that illuminates each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is turned off as a special watermelon payout appearance. As a payout appearance for special watermelon, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 1 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 corresponding to the above-mentioned one medal payout. That is, the watermelon payout appearance and the special watermelon payout appearance are different so that the player can distinguish them. In addition, different effects are set for the payout appearances of other specific roles and the payout appearances of special specific roles so that the player can identify them. It can be identified by the difference and the difference in the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62.

After the processing of step S5705 is performed, the main payout processing is terminated.

As a payout setting for the specific mode, first, in step S5706, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is one as the specific number. If the number is not one, the process proceeds to step S5702, and the payout setting for the normal game mode is performed.

If the game is set with the special addition flag and is played with one bet, the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, a process of subtracting 1 from the addition counter is performed. Then, in step S5708, it is determined whether or not the addition counter becomes 0. If it is 0, the special addition flag is cleared in step S5709. The processes of steps S5707 to S5709 are processes when a plurality of special addition games occur consecutively.

If a negative determination is made in step S5708, or after the process of step S5709 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5710. In step S5710, it is determined whether or not the special watermelon (26th P small winning combination) prize has been established. If the special watermelon prize has been established, the payout process corresponding to the special watermelon prize is performed in step S5711. In this case, unlike the payout process in step S5703, the event that the number of payouts this time is added to the credit counter and exceeds the upper limit of the credit counter is unlikely to occur. That is, the credit counter is decremented by 1 by one bet in the specific mode this time, and even if 1 which is the number of payouts this time is added, the upper limit value of the credit counter is not exceeded. The medal payout is not performed when the upper limit value of the credit counter is not exceeded, and the medal payout is performed by controlling the hopper device 51 only when the upper limit value of the credit counter is exceeded. The case where the actual medal payout occurs is a case where the credit counter is the upper limit value before the start of the specific mode and the specific mode is executed by inserting one medal from the medal insertion slot 45. .. The payout process is the same for other special special winning prizes.

In the following step S5712, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted in correspondence with the watermelon prize instead of the special watermelon prize which is the result of this prize. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether or not the actual medal payout is performed. Then, in step S5713, it is controlled so that the watermelon payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the watermelon prize instead of the special watermelon prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for watermelon. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

When it is determined in step S5710 that the special watermelon prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5714 whether or not the special strong cherry (25P small role, etc.) prize has been established. If the special strong cherry prize is established, the payout process corresponding to the special strong cherry prize is performed in step S5715.

In the following step S5716, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the strong cherry is emitted in correspondence with the strong cherry winning instead of the special strong cherry winning which is the winning result of this time. Then, in step S5717, it is controlled so that the strong cherry payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the strong cherry prize instead of the special strong cherry prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for strong cherries. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5714 that the special strong cherry prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5718 whether or not the special weak cherry (18P small role, etc.) prize has been established. If the special weak cherry prize is established, the payout process corresponding to the special weak cherry prize is performed in step S5719.

In the following step S5720, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the weak cherry is emitted in correspondence with the weak cherry prize instead of the special weak cherry prize which is the result of this prize. Then, in step S5721, it is controlled so that the weak cherry payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the weak cherry prize instead of the special weak cherry prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for weak cherries. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5718 that the special weak cherry prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5722 whether or not the special middle bell (29th P small role, etc.) prize has been established. If the special middle bell winning is established, the payout process corresponding to the special middle bell winning is performed in step S5723.

In the following step S5724, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the middle bell is emitted in correspondence with the middle bell prize instead of the special middle bell prize which is the result of this prize. Then, in step S5725, it is controlled so that the payout appearance for the middle bell is performed in correspondence with the middle bell prize instead of the special middle bell prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for the middle bell. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5722 that the special middle-stage bell winning has not been established, it means that the winning result in the specific mode this time is the special red 7 set (30th P small role) winning. In this case, in step S5726, the payout process corresponding to the special red 7 matching prize is performed.

In the following step S5727, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the red 7 matching payout sound effect is emitted in correspondence with the red 7 matching winning instead of the special red 7 matching winning which is the result of this winning. Then, in step S5728, it is controlled so that the red 7-matched payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the red 7-matched prize instead of the special red 7-matched prize which is the result of this winning. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for the red 7 match. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

After performing any of the processes of step S5713, step S5717, step S5721, step S5725 and step S5728, the payout setting for the specific mode is completed, and the payout process is completed.

<Processing for replay>
Next, the replay processing in the payout determination processing (FIG. 125) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 127.

In step S5801, it is determined whether or not the special addition is set. If the special addition is not set, the process for the normal game mode is performed in step S5802 and step S5803. On the other hand, when the special addition flag is set, the processing for the specific mode is performed in steps S5804 to S5809.

That is, as a process for the normal game mode, in step S5802, a bet sound effect setting process is performed. In such a process, a bet-time sound effect corresponding to the number of re-bets corresponding to the number of bets in the game executed this time is set. Specifically, if a re-game prize occurs in a 3-bet game, a 3-card bet sound (bebebe) is set, and if a re-game prize occurs in a 2-bet game, a 2-card bet time is set. A sound effect (bebe) is set, and when a replay winning is generated in a one-bet game, a sound effect (be) at the time of one bet is set. These set bet sound effects are output from the speaker 64 when the virtual medal is automatically inserted into the next game based on the replay winning. Specifically, the automatic loading process is performed in the start waiting process in the normal process (FIG. 14), and the bet sound effect set in accordance with the automatic loading is output.

The subsequent re-bet process in step S5803 is a process of preparing to automatically bet a number corresponding to the number of bets in the game executed this time in the start waiting process (step S204) in the normal process (FIG. 14). Is. Specifically, in the case of a 3-bet game, the 3-card automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that the 3-card bet is placed in the start waiting process, and in the case of a 2-bet game, the 2-card bet starts. Two automatic loading flags are set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that they are performed in the wait process, and one bet is set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that one bet is performed in the start wait process in the case of a one-bet game. Set the automatic input flag. In the start waiting process, by checking these automatic insertion flags, it is possible to identify that the re-game winning was established in the previous game, and the number of virtual medals corresponding to the set automatic insertion flags is automatically inserted. Perform processing. Then, at the time of the automatic charging, the bet sound effect set in step S5802 is output. After performing the process of step S5803, the process for replaying is terminated.

When the special addition flag is set in step S5801, as a process for the specific mode, in step S5804, it is determined whether or not the current game is a one-bet game. If it is not a one-bet game, the process proceeds to step S5802, and processing for the normal game mode is performed. If it is a 1-bet game, the addition counter is subtracted in step S5805. Then, in step S5806, it is determined whether or not the addition counter is 0, and if it is 0, a process of clearing the special addition flag is performed in step S5807. The processes of steps S5805 to S5807 correspond to the processes of steps S5707 to S5709.

If the addition counter is not 0 in step S5806, or after the process of step S5807 is executed, a process of setting a three-sheet bet sound effect is performed in step S5808. Then, in step S5809, as a special re-bet process, the one-sheet automatic insertion flag is set so that the one-sheet bet is performed in the start waiting process. As a result, in the next game when the special replay prize is established by the special addition, one virtual medal is automatically inserted and the sound effect at the time of three bets is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the game in which the special addition was made was a one-bet game. After that, the process for replaying is completed.

As described above, in the specific mode in which the special addition is performed, if the special special role prize is established, one medal, which is the corresponding privilege, is paid out, while the payout sound effect and the payout appearance payout are the special special role prizes. The payout sound effect and payout appearance corresponding to a specific role are set, not corresponding to. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the specific role prize and the special specific role prize has been won.

On the other hand, even if the special special role winning is established, if the game is played in a situation where the special addition flag is not set, it is not the payout sound effect or payout appearance corresponding to the special special role winning, but the special specific. The one corresponding to the winning combination is set. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the special addition is not effective. For example, even though the special red 7-match prize is established in the 1-bet game in the normal game state, the addition can be made. It is possible to prevent it from appearing unnatural when it does not occur.

In the special addition, when a special re-game prize is established, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and a sound effect at the time of three bets is emitted. By doing this, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the special re-game prize was established in the game in which the special addition was made, or whether the special re-game prize was established by simply playing the 1-bet game regardless of the special addition. Can be made to.

<Modification 1>
In the present modification 1, when determining the addition game at the time of special addition, the game result that triggered the special addition is added. That is, not only the game result in the specific mode but also the game result of the normal game mode in which the specific mode is executed is taken into consideration to determine the privilege in the specific mode.

FIG. 128 shows a lottery table for special addition in the present modification 1. The special addition lottery table is acquired in each process (step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, step S5412) of the lottery result corresponding processing for the specific mode.

In the special watermelon table, the special strong cherry table, the special weak cherry table, and the special middle bell table in the first modification, as shown in FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (d), this additional winning was triggered. The number of additional games is set to differ according to the type of specific role. In this case, the number of additional games is set to be the largest when the winning combination that triggered the addition and the special role of this time correspond (consecutively).

That is, in the special watermelon table, the trigger of the extra winning is the watermelon winning, and in the specific mode as the special extra carried out after that, when the special watermelon is won, it stops as if the watermelon winning occurred twice in a row. The winning games will be continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest. Also, at the special strong cherry table, the trigger for the extra winning was the strong cherry winning, and in the specific mode as the special extra that was carried out after that, if the special strong cherry was won, did the strong cherry winning occur twice in a row? The games with stop rolls such as are continuous, and in this case, the number of special extra games is set to be the largest. At the special weak cherry table, the opportunity to win the extra is the weak cherry, and in the specific mode as the special extra that was carried out after that, when the special weak cherry is won, it seems as if the weak cherry was won twice in a row. The number of games with a stop roll will be continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest. As for the special middle-tier bell table, if the additional winning was triggered by the middle-tier bell winning, and in the specific mode as the special additional winning that was carried out after that, if the special middle-tier bell was won, did the middle-tier bell winning occur twice in a row? Such stop-rolling games will be continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest.

In the special replay table and the special red 7-matched table, unlike the case of the other special special combination tables described above, the event that the specific combination and the corresponding special specific combination are continuously won does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 128 (e) and 128 (f), in the special replay table and the special red 7-matched table, the number of additional games is increased according to the type of the specific role that triggered the additional winning this time. It is set to be different.

By doing the above, the number of additional games is determined in consideration of the game result in the normal game mode that triggered the occurrence of the special addition. improves.

In this case, for example, when various specific winning combinations are won consecutively in the normal game mode, the number of additional games may be determined on a lottery table different from the case where the winnings are not consecutively won. By doing so, the continuity between the specific combination winning in the normal game mode and the special specific combination winning in the specific mode can be associated with the continuity of the specific combination winning in the normal game mode, and the normal game mode and the specific mode can be associated with each other. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the continuity with and from the continuity in the normal game mode.

<Modification 2>
In the present modification 2, in the lottery table in the specific mode, a special BAR replay 1 (IV = 61) is set instead of the special replay as a winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 129, at the index value IV = 61, the winning combination at the time of winning the special BAR replay is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment, the first special re-game, the sixth special re-game, and the seventh. A special re-game and an eighth special re-game are set.

Each of these special re-games is given a re-game as a privilege at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 130, in the first special replay, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "red bell" symbol stops at 32R, and it is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned first lip small winning combination. In the sixth special replay prize, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, and the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M. However, any of the "BAR" symbol, the "youth" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R, which is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned 6P lip small winning combination. In the 7th special replay prize, the "1st replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "youth" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. , It is set as a winning mode similar to the above 7th reel small winning combination. In the 8th special replay prize, the "1st replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. It is set as a winning mode similar to the reel small role.

When the special BAR replay 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 131, any special replay is won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In this case, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the 7th special re-game (BAR middle stage alignment) prize can be established, the 7th special re-game prize is established and the 7th special re-game prize is established. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when is not established, another special re-game prize is established.

If the special BAR replay 1 is won at the time of special addition in the attack mode, the VB mode winning is given. In this case, after the special addition is completed, the VB mode winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode for the VB mode, and after the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the 4th and 5th replay prizes are established, Shift to VB mode.

The state of the special addition of the present modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 132.

As described above, in the lottery table in the specific mode in the present modification 2, the special BAR replay 1 may be won, and if the special BAR replay 1 is won, the replay prize is won and the next game is also a 1-bet game. Is executed. That is, in the lottery table in the second modification, the special watermelon, the special strong cherry, the special weak cherry, and the special red 7 set are won with a probability of 5/6, and 1/6. Win a special BAR replay 1 with a probability. If you win a special specific role with a probability of 5/6, the lottery table for special addition is acquired as described above, the number of additional games is determined, and the number of games in attack mode is added. Occur.

On the other hand, if the special BAR replay 1 is won with a probability of 1/6, the VB mode winning will be given along with the replay as a privilege at the time of winning. Then, on the auxiliary display unit 65, a display of "VB + 1" indicating that the VB mode has been won is made.

In this modification 2, the special addition does not end due to the re-game winning, and the special addition is also performed in the next game. Then, even in the next game, there is a possibility that the special BAR replay 1 will be won with a probability of 1/6. If you win the special BAR replay 1, you will be given a VB mode win as well as a replay as a privilege at the time of winning, as described above. Then, on the auxiliary display unit 65, a display of "VB + 1" indicating that the VB mode has been won is made.

As mentioned above, by winning the re-game, a special addition will be made in the next game. In the example of FIG. 132, in this game, the special watermelon is won as a special specific role instead of the special BAR replay 1, and the corresponding number of games is added. Then, the special addition will be completed by winning the special special role.

In the example of FIG. 132, it means that the VB mode has been won twice. In this case, when the special addition is completed, the VB mode winning notification is performed, and the first VB mode is executed after the fourth and fifth re-game winnings. When the first VB mode ends, the transition from the normal gaming state to the 1st RT state by the transition roll, the transition to the 2nd RT state by the 3rd re-game winning, and then the 4th and 5th re-gaming winning 2 The second VB mode is executed. When the second VB mode is completed, the normal game state is changed to the second RT state, and the attack mode is changed.

By doing the above, the playability when special addition is performed is improved. That is, by preventing the special addition from ending at the time of winning the re-game, the inconvenience that the game in the normal game mode is executed in the 1-bet game after the special addition is eliminated.

The above configuration may be used, for example, in a specialized zone. Specifically, for the special addition generated during the attack mode, the one of the second embodiment is adopted, and for the special addition generated during the special zone, the one of the modification 2 is adopted. By doing so, it is possible to reproduce the inconvenience caused by the re-game winning, in which the additions occur continuously in the special zone.

<Modification 3>
In the third modification, when the game is played with three bets instead of one bet in the situation where the special addition flag is set, the addition according to the lottery result in the normal game mode with three bets is performed. generate. In the present modification 3, in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 120 (a)), when the number of bets is 3 bets in the process of step S5301, if the special addition flag is not set, step S701 If the special addition flag is set, the process proceeds to substantially the same process as the process for dealing with the lottery result for the specific mode of FIG. 120 (b). That is, in the case where the number of bets is 3 and the special addition flag is set, each special specific combination is assigned in the processes of steps S5402 to S5414 in the flow of FIG. 120 (b). It is applied by replacing it with a specific role. For example, in the process of whether or not the special watermelon is won in step S5402, it is determined whether or not the watermelon is won, and if the watermelon is won, the watermelon table is acquired as a special addition table in step S5403.

FIG. 133 shows a special special combination table for special addition and a specific combination table for special addition. The special specific combination table of FIGS. 133 (a1) to 133 (a6) is the same as that of FIGS. 121 (a1) to 121 (a6). On the other hand, in the special additional combination table, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b1) to 133 (b4), the number of games to be added is set to be larger than the number of additional games in the special additional combination table. Has been done.

On the other hand, in the replay table shown in FIG. 133 (b5), the number of additional games is not set, and the additional games do not occur. Further, even in the red 7-matched table shown in FIG. 133 (b6), the number of additional games is not set.

That is, in the winning / failing determination in the normal game mode, the probability of winning the specific combination is lower than the probability of winning the special specific combination in the specific mode. In that respect, if the special addition is executed in the normal game mode and the specific combination is won, the number of games added is larger than that in the case where the special addition is executed in the specific mode and the special special combination is won. In this way, by letting the player select a game that is significantly different from the special addition performed in the specific mode and the special addition performed in the normal game mode, it is possible to greatly improve the game performance at the time of the special addition. Become.

In addition, when the special addition is carried out in the normal game mode, the addition is prevented from occurring when the replay is won. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the imbalance in which the addition occurs even in the normal game mode by winning the replay with a relatively high probability.

<Modification example 4>
In the present modification 4, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, one bet may be placed or three bets may be placed. FIG. 134 shows a part of the bet operation process in the present modification 4.

That is, if it is determined in step S5513 in FIG. 123 that the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is performed instead of the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, the process proceeds to step S5901. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. When the special addition flag is set, in steps S5902 to S5904, the processing for one-sheet betting in steps S5517 and S5518 and the processing for setting the sound effect for three-sheet betting in step S5521 are performed.

If the special addition flag is not set in step S5901, a 3-card bet process is performed in step S5905, a process of subtracting 3 from the credit counter in step S5906, and a 3-card bet effect in step S5907. Set the sound. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S5506 to S5508. After performing the process of step S5904 or step S5907, the process for this operation is terminated.

By doing so, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 can be used even in the normal game mode. In this case, for example, in a game in which a normal addition occurs in the normal game mode, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 may be operated. For example, in the normal addition, the number of additional games is notified at the end of one game (when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped), or in addition, the number of additional games is notified at the time of betting operation of the next game. do. Then, as a betting operation of the next game, a special operation instruction effect is generated to prompt the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, and the number of additional games is notified based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In this way, in the normal game mode, in a game in which an additional attack mode may occur and a specific winning combination is won, the number of additional games is notified at the end of the game and the bet of the next game. There are cases where the game is performed at the time of operation (when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated) and cases where the game is performed at the end of the next game, and the notification mode of the number of additional games can be varied.

In this case, the number of games notified at the time of betting operation of the next game is likely to be larger than the number of games notified at the end of the specific winning combination winning game in the normal game mode, and the number of games is notified at the time of betting operation of the next game. The number of games notified at the end of the next game may be larger than the number of games. In this way, the later the notification timing is, the more advantageous the configuration can be expected, and it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the situation in which the additional notification is performed.

The number of games notified at the earlier timing may be rewritten by the notification of the number of games at the later timing. For example, as the previous timing, at the end of the game at the time of winning the specific combination, for example, the addition of 10 games may be notified, and the addition may be rewritten to, for example, 30 games based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. Based on the result of the game in the mode, the configuration may be rewritten to add, for example, 100 games at the end of the game. By doing so, the stepwise addition can be performed with the operation of the player, so that the enjoyment of each operation can be greatly improved.

<Modification 5>
In a configuration in which both 1 bet and 3 bets are possible based on the operation of the 4th credit insertion switch 69 as in the above modification 4, the number of bets based on the operation of the 4th credit insertion switch 69 is the player. The configuration may be difficult to identify. For example, in the modification example 4, when a special operation instruction effect is generated, the game is started by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and operating the start lever 41, in which the player is in a specific mode with one bet. It is difficult to tell whether it is in the normal game mode with 3 bets or not. In this case, if the special addition is won, the game is in the specific mode, and if the special addition is not won, the game is in the normal game mode.

As described above, by making it difficult to distinguish the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game from the bet operation, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand which of the two games is being played, and the specific role (special identification) is made. Role) It is considered that each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated while wishing to win. Therefore, it is possible to attract more interest to the game.

In particular, since the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game can be switched back and forth without going through the transition of the gaming state, it is more difficult to understand which game is being played. Since the configuration is such that the game can be moved back and forth without going through the transition of the gaming state as described above, it is possible to generate the return between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game at various timings. It is possible to shift from a 3-bet game to a 1-bet game when it is desired to generate some kind of effect or to give some kind of privilege, not limited to the case where a special addition is won as in the embodiment of. ..

<Modification 6>
In the present modification 6, the configuration of the fourth credit input switch 69 is changed. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in the present modification 6.

In the present modification 6, the fifth credit input switch 75 is provided on the side opposite to the start lever 41 with the stop switches 42 to 44 interposed therebetween. The fifth credit input switch 75 is a lever-type operation unit that can be switched up and down. Normally, it is arranged at the upper initial position, and when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated toward the lower operation position, the operation detection signal is mainly used as the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is valid. It is output to the control device 101. The main control device 101 determines that the operation of one bet has been performed based on the operation detection signal. Inside the fifth credit input switch 75, an urging means (leaf spring or the like) (not shown) for urging from the operating position to the initial position is provided, and the urging means is operated to the operating position. 5 The credit input switch 75 automatically returns to the initial position.

A second start lever 76 is provided on the right side of the fifth credit input switch 75 in parallel. The second start lever 76 has the same function as the first start lever 41, and when the start conditions of each game are satisfied, when the second start lever 76 is operated, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The rotation of the game is started and the lottery for the game is performed.

At the tip of the fifth credit input switch 75, a first operation unit 75a having a spherical shape on the left and right halves (left half) is provided. Further, a second operation portion 76a having a spherical shape on the left and right halves (right half) is provided at the tip end portion of the second start lever 76. Then, the fifth credit input switch 75 and the second start lever 76 are installed close to each other so that a spherical shape is formed by both the operation portions 75a and 76a. Therefore, the first operation unit 75a of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 and the second operation unit 76a of the second start lever 76 can be operated at the same time, and the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated. The second start lever 76 is easily operated, and when the second start lever 76 is operated, the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is also easily operated.

In the fifth credit input switch 75, the first lever main body 75b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 main body than the first operation unit 75a, has a second start lever 76, which is closer to the slot machine 10 main body than the second operation unit 76a. A credit side cover 75c that covers the 2 lever main body 76b from above is provided. Since the credit side cover 75c is provided, when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated downward, the credit side cover 75c causes the second lever body 76b of the second start lever 76 to face downward. Pressed and the second start lever 76 is operated. As a result, when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated, the second start lever 76 is also operated.

With the above configuration, it is possible to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without separately operating the start lever when a special addition or the like occurs. This makes it possible to enhance the impression that the game in the specific mode is a special game while reducing the distinctiveness of the game in the specific mode from the game in the normal game mode.

Further, since the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 as described above, not only the operability when a special addition or the like occurs is improved, but also the bet operation is performed. The period from to the start of the game is shorter than that of the configuration in which each is operated separately. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult to confirm that a credit is subtracted or a valid line is set based on a bet operation in a game when a special addition or the like occurs. This makes it possible to make the distinction between the specific mode and the normal game mode lower.

As described above, the second credit insertion switch 57 and the start lever 41, which can operate one bet while the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75, are separately provided. It is provided. Therefore, in a game in which a special addition or the like occurs, it is possible to perform a bet operation and a start operation separately. By doing so, the fifth credit insertion switch is used within the range that does not reduce the real thrill of the game of the slot machine 10, that is, the game is started based on the operation of the player and the game is ended based on the operation. The operability can be improved by the 75 and the second start lever 76.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment, the winning probability of each special combination is set to the same probability as the winning probability of each corresponding combination in the normal game mode, but some may be different probabilities or all may be different probabilities. May be. For example, if the winning probability of the special specific combination corresponding to the specific combination is set to be higher than the winning probability of the specific combination, in the game in the specific mode, the transition lottery such as the attack mode in the normal game mode, the addition, etc. It will be easier to experience the lottery. On the other hand, if the probability is lower than that of the specific combination, in the game in the specific mode, the transition lottery such as the attack mode in the normal game mode and the lottery such as the addition are not easily performed. As a result, it becomes easy for the player who has experienced that the transition lottery such as the attack mode is not easily performed in the specific mode for practice to experience that the transition lottery or the like in the normal game mode is executed frequently.

Further, the winning probability of the first PBB or the second PBB in the specific mode may be different from the first BB or the second BB in the normal game mode, for example, a higher probability than the first BB or the second BB, or the first BB or the second BB. It may be a lower probability than. If the probability is high, it will be easier to experience the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, while if the probability is low, the bonus state will be terminated by shifting to the bonus state (special bonus state) during the specific mode. It is possible to make it difficult to generate the event that the lottery of the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode is not performed until.

(2) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in the specific mode is set to be equivalent to the lottery table in the normal game state in the normal game mode, but the lottery table in another game state (for example, a bonus state). It may be set to be equivalent to.

(3) In the first embodiment, the condition that the end condition of the first PBB or the second PBB is terminated by the execution of the game the number of times including the number of times the production of the first BB or the second BB is executed (24 payouts). However, in order to be able to finish the game earlier, the game may be finished with a smaller number of payouts (for example, 3 cards) than the payout of 24 cards. For example, in the case of a configuration that ends with a payout of 3 cards, 3 games (1 bet, 1 payout is 3 games) in a 1-bet game, and 1 game (3 bets, 3 payouts is 1 game) in a 3-bet game. Therefore, it is possible to finish the game earlier than the first embodiment.

(4) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB are provided, but the first PBB and the second PBB may not be provided. Instead, a winning mode similar to the winning mode of the first PBB or the second PBB, that is, a one-card payout combination that wins with the same roll as the first BB or second BB winning in the normal game mode is provided. Then, it is advisable to generate an effect of winning the first PBB or the second PBB (winning) at the time of winning the one payout combination (at the time of winning). In this case, if the winning combination can be won in the winning game by assuming that the one payout combination is a winning combination, it is not necessary to provide a process corresponding to the state in which the first PBB and the second PBB are carried over.

Further, in this case, the special role (30P small role, etc.) corresponding to the winning combination (30th small role, etc.) during the bonus state, the special role that can be won during the normal game state, and the stop switches 42 to 44. The winning / non-winning is different depending on the difference in the operation order, and after winning the 1-card payout winning combination with the same result as the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning result, the predetermined number of games (for example, 24 games) is reached. Then, the operation order of the special combination corresponding to the winning combination is notified during the bonus state, and the special combination winning is established. This makes it possible to experience a pseudo bonus state over a predetermined number of games.

Further, as the push order combination, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned out-of-order small combinations are provided, and a push order combination in which a plurality of out-of-order small combinations are set is provided. That is, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation order, the first out-of-order small winning combination is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation order. In that case, the second out-of-order small winning combination prize is established. Then, when the player wins the 1-card payout combination corresponding to the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB and does not win the prize in the result corresponding to the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB prize (when the 1-card payout combination is won in a random manner). ) Shall be configured to pay out one medal and to make different types of out-of-order small wins to be notified when the above-mentioned push order wins are won. That is, before the winning of the one payout combination corresponding to the first PBB and the second PBB, the first operation order is notified so that the first out-of-order small combination can easily win, or the first operation order is normally carried out. The operation order is set to be easy (the order of stopping from the left reel, etc.), and the operation order of the second small winning combination is notified after the one-card payout corresponding to the first PBB and the second PBB is won. By doing so, it is possible to make the so-called reach eyes appear by making the outcomes different between the carry-over state and the non-carry-over state.

(5) In the first embodiment, the specific mode is basically performed by using the 1-bet game, but the specific mode may be performed by using the 2-bet game, or the normal game mode is set to 3. A configuration may be configured in which a specific mode is performed in a 3-bet game after being configured to be performed in a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game instead of a bet game.

(6) In the first embodiment, each RT state is set in addition to the normal game state and the bonus state even in the one-bet game, and the transition (promotion / fall) to each RT state corresponds to each re-game. It may be configured to be performed as a special replay or a special transition as a result. In this case, if at least one small winning combination is provided, the one-bet game can be played as a (small) free mode in which the number of medals is not increased or decreased.

(7) In the first embodiment, even in the lottery process of the one-bet game, a result that does not win at any index value may be provided.

(8) In the first embodiment, which of the normal game mode and the specific mode is implemented may be configured so that it can be output externally. The external output destination may be, for example, a hall computer in the game hall or a data display installed in the game hall. In this case, the hall computer or the data display device may be configured to manage the game history of the normal game mode and the game history of the specific mode separately, or at least manage the game history of the normal game mode while managing the game history of the specific mode. It may be configured not to manage.

(9) In the first embodiment, the configuration that makes it possible to distinguish between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to the stamp 65a and the identification accessory 65b described above, and may be another configuration. For example, when it is possible to identify by the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65, the background color or the like may be different between the normal game mode and the specific mode in place of or in addition to the stamp 65a. In this case, when the display control device 81 determines the display content in the specific mode, the effect data of the corresponding effect content in the normal game mode is acquired, and the color data in the effect data is rewritten. It is good to display the contents in the specific mode. As a result, the storage capacity can be significantly reduced as compared with the configuration in which the effect data for the specific mode is separately stored. Further, in the case where the identification accessory 65b can be identified, if the position protruding from the slot machine 10 (for example, upward) is set as a specific position, the manager of the game hall or the like is in the specific mode from a distance. Can be easily grasped.

Further, at the side end of the slot machine 10 (for example, on the right side opposite to the rotation axis side), an upright wall is provided so as to project forward and extend vertically. Then, the identification display may be performed by using the wall portion of the upright wall. This does not bother the player playing the game while visually recognizing each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop switches 42 to 44, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and is easy for the manager of the game hall. It is possible to display the identification at a position that can be confirmed. In this case, for example, the identification display may not be performed on the wall portion of the upright wall facing the inside (player side), but the identification display may be performed on the wall portion of the upright wall facing the outside (adjacent gaming machine side). By doing so, it is possible to make the display unnoticeable to the player who is playing the game even more. In addition, by doing so, it becomes possible for a player who is playing a game on an adjacent gaming machine to easily understand that the game on the adjacent gaming machine (main gaming machine) is in a specific mode. It is also possible to prevent the playability of this gaming machine, which does not reduce medals, from being mistaken for fraudulent activity.

(10) In the first embodiment, in the lottery table in the specific mode, the winning combinations are all set to be different between the normal game state and the bonus state (special bonus state), but some of them are set. The winning combinations may be duplicated, or all the winning combinations may be duplicated, and at least the winning probability of each winning combination may be different between the normal game state and the bonus state.

(11) In the first embodiment, in the specific mode, a game in which one bet and one payout are both played in the normal game state and the bonus state, but these normal game states and the bonus state are used. It suffices if the expected number of medals to be paid out is the same as the number of medals inserted. In the bonus state, a three-card bet and a three-card payout game may be played (expected payout number for the number of medals inserted = 3/3). In addition, although the gameplay with no loss result was explained in both the normal game state and the bonus state, if the game is realized with the playability with the loss result, the medal is inserted including the loss result in each state. It suffices if the expected number of payouts is the same as the number.

(12) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in the one-bet game may be set as so-called non-missing combinations. By doing so, it is possible to surely establish the first PBB prize and the second PBB prize in the game in which the first PBB or the second PBB is won. This makes it possible to eliminate the loss of medals that occurs when the first PBB and the second PBB are carried over.

(13) In the first embodiment, the first PBB or the second PBB that can be won in the one-bet game may be set as a winning combination in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the loss of medals that occurs in the first PBB winning game and the second PBB winning game.

(14) In the first embodiment, when the special replay winning is established in the specific mode, the automatic bet may not be made. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the presence and absence of the bet operation with the small winning combination. Further, when the small winning combination of the rip is established, one medal may be automatically bet instead of paying out one medal. Even in this way, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the presence or absence of the betting operation between the small winning combination of the rip and the special replay winning.

(15) In the second embodiment, the configuration of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and the fifth credit insertion switch 75 that perform a bet operation for a specific mode is not limited to the above, and may be other operation units. good. For example, the entire decorative panel 80 may be an operation unit capable of pressing operation, and the operation unit in the decorative panel 80 may be configured to perform a bet operation for a specific mode. Further, a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be provided, and the detection of a part of the player's body such as a hand by these sensors may be configured as a betting operation in the specific mode. Further, a MAX bet button may be provided, and the number of bets placed by the operation of the MAX bet button may be different depending on the presence or absence of a special addition flag or the like.

(16) In the second embodiment, the winning combination in the specific mode is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and may be ones including other winning combinations or ones not including any of the above-mentioned ones. For example, the first PBB and the second PBB may also be configured to be elected. If you win the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB, you will be in a bonus state over the specified number of games (until the specified number of games are paid out). It may be configured to shift to the bonus state with and further add in each game in the bonus state (that is, treat as a special zone).

Further, for example, although the special re-game and the special red 7 set are provided, the configuration may be such that the special re-game and the special red 7 set are not provided.

A non-winning result that does not win may be provided for any of the winning combinations, or a small winning combination may be provided as in the first embodiment. In these non-winning results and small wins, the number of additional games may be reduced or the additional games may not occur.

Special watermelons, special strong cherries, special weak cherries, special middle bells, special replays, and special red 7 sets are provided as special specific roles, but one or more of these may be configured to win. Further, a plurality of lottery tables in a specific mode may be provided, and the winning combination and the winning combination may be different depending on each table. In this case, for example, in the normal game mode, if the second RT state (corresponding to the attack mode), the lottery of the specific mode is performed at the table that wins the special watermelon, and the third RT state (corresponding to the VB mode). For example, the lottery table in the specific mode may be different depending on the game state in the normal game mode, such as the lottery in the specific mode is performed at the table that wins the special red 7 match.

(17) In the second embodiment, the winning combination in the specific mode may be a configuration including a pushing order combination or a configuration in which any combination is a pushing order combination. As the push order role, for example, a push order role of a special watermelon and a special strong cherry is set, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is the corresponding special special role winning, is notified according to the number of additional games won. It may be configured. For example, in the above-mentioned special watermelon and special strong cherry, the special strong cherry is set so that the number of additional games is larger as a whole. Therefore, when a relatively large number of additional games are selected during the lottery of the specific mode in the special addition, the operation order for winning the special strong cherry is notified, and when a small number of additional games are selected, the special watermelon is won. Notify the operation order. By doing so, it becomes possible to better relate the winning combination and the number of additional games.

In addition, as the push order role, each special specific role in the second embodiment and a role of a roll for notifying the grant of a privilege such as a predetermined bonus (for example, a fourth lip small role or a first rip role in the first embodiment). 5 Lip small combination) and push order combination may be provided. In addition, a winning combination for notifying the grant of a privilege such as the predetermined bonus and a pushing order combination between the out-of-order small winning combination may be provided. Then, regardless of whether or not the special addition is won, the game is played in a specific mode, and if the special addition is won, the above-mentioned predetermined bonus or other privilege is given. The operation order may be notified, and if not won, the operation order of the out-of-order small winning combination or the special specific winning combination may be notified.

(18) In the second embodiment, the timing for performing the game in the specific mode is not limited to the time when the attack mode is added, and may be another timing. For example, in the normal mode, it may be used as a winning notification effect in the challenge mode or the attack mode. In this case, for example, as in (17) above, each combination in the specific mode is used as a push order combination with the combination of the rolls that notify the grant of benefits such as predetermined bonuses. Then, when the challenge mode or the attack mode is won, the operation order in which the winning combination that notifies the above-mentioned privilege grant is notified is notified, and if the winning combination is not won, the above-mentioned special specific role or the loss is notified. It is preferable to use a configuration that notifies the operation order in which the small winning combination can win a prize.

(19) In the second embodiment, when a specific combination is won during the normal game mode and a prize is generated (when a payout is made), a special addition by the specific mode is likely to occur, and a prize is generated. If it is not allowed to be paid out (when it is not paid out due to omission), a special addition in a specific mode may be less likely to occur. By doing so, it is possible to improve the significance of preventing the occurrence of omissions by so-called pressing when a specific combination is won. Moreover, in this way, the event that the credit counter is 0 at the start of the specific mode is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize the playability of operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 in the specific mode.

(20) In the second embodiment, the closer the value of the credit counter is to the upper limit value, the less likely it is that the special addition by the specific mode will occur, and the farther the value is from the upper limit value (the smaller the value of the credit counter), the more the special addition by the specific mode will be. The configuration may be such that it is likely to occur. At the time of special addition in a specific mode, even if one card is paid out, the sound effect corresponding to the payout sound effect of the normal game mode is generated. As the sound is output, 1 is added to the credit counter. In this case, if the special watermelon prize is established in a situation where the value of the credit counter is close to the upper limit (for example, 49), the credit counter should be incremented by 1 in response to the payout of 5 watermelon prizes. The upper limit is set to (50), and four medals are paid out from the hopper device 51. However, in the case of a special watermelon prize, only the credit counter is added and no medals are paid out. Then, even though the effect at the time of winning the watermelon was set at the time of winning the special watermelon, the fact that the medal was not paid out from the hopper device 51 clearly identifies that the watermelon was won. Therefore, if the smaller the value of the credit counter is, the more likely it is that special additions will occur in the specific mode, it will be possible to prevent the contradiction of whether or not medals are paid out in order to generate a pseudo-specific winning combination. Become. In this case, for example, if the credit counter is 41 or less, a special addition by the specific mode will occur so that even if 9 cards corresponding to the maximum number of cards to be paid out for the specific winning combination are paid out, only the credit counter will be added. It may be configured to be easy and less likely to occur when it exceeds 41.

(21) In the second embodiment, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added or the VB mode is added as a special addition in the specific mode, but the privilege of the game in the specific mode is not limited to this. For example, as a privilege of the game in the specific mode, a rare image may be given, or a password or the like that can change the effect in the normal game mode may be given. In the configuration in which the rare image is given, the rarity of the rare image given may be different depending on the type of the special specific combination won in the game in the specific mode. Further, in the configuration in which a password or the like is given, the effect in the normal game mode that can be changed may be different depending on the type of the special specific combination that is won in the game in the specific mode.

(22) In the second embodiment, in the credit display invisible processing in step S5503, the display of the credit display unit 60 and the like is turned off. For example, although the display of the credit display unit 60 and the like continues, the display thereof is continued. The visibility of the display may be reduced (for example, the display may be slightly smaller than usual), or the visibility of the credit display unit 60 or the like may be improved by performing the effect at a position overlapping the credit display unit 60 or the like. It may be configured to be lowered (for example, a configuration in which the accessory is overlapped with the credit display unit 60 or the like in the front-rear direction).

(23) In the second embodiment, the privilege of the specific role that triggers the special addition may be different from the above. For example, three medals may be paid out instead of five medals being paid out based on the watermelon winning prize. In this case, in the game played as a 3-bet game, the situation where the watermelon role winning in which 3 medals are paid out is established, and in the game played as a 1-bet game, 1 medal is paid out in a special watermelon. In both situations, where the winning combination is established, it becomes difficult for the actual medal to be paid out (it can be stopped only by increasing or decreasing the credit counter), which is preferable in reducing the distinction between the two situations. That is, by setting the privilege of the specific role that triggers the special addition to 3 or less, which is the number of bets, it is possible to suitably reduce the distinctiveness from the situation where the special special role winning is established.

(24) The normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone configuration, transition opportunity, transition probability, number of continuous games, etc. as display modes are not limited to the above, and may be other configurations. May be good. For example, in each of the above embodiments, the special zone is configured to shift to the 7th re-game prize during the VB mode, but it may be configured to shift to the attack mode, and the role that triggers the transition may also be used. For example, it may be a part of a specific role such as a watermelon.

(25) The configuration of the normal gaming state, the RT state, and the bonus state as the gaming state, the transition opportunity, the transition probability, the number of continuous games, and the like are not limited to the above, and may be other configurations. In this case, for example, in the first embodiment, it is preferable to set a special winning combination in the specific mode, which is a stop roll that appears at the transition of the gaming state.

(26) The effective lines set in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game are not limited to the downward-sloping line L4 and the bent line L6. For example, in a 3-bet game, a bending line L6 may be set, and in a 1-bet game, a downward-sloping line L4 may be set. In this case, for example, it is advisable to set the winning mode of each winning combination so that the winning is won when the outcome that is stopped in the 3-bet game in each of the above embodiments is stopped.

(27) The auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, audio is output from the speaker 64 to notify the operation order. The configuration may be such that the lamp of the stop switch to be operated next is lit and displayed in a different emission color from other stop switches to indicate the operation order, and the backlight of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be configured. The reel may be turned on or off to indicate the reel to be stopped next, or another display device or accessory device may be provided to notify the operation order by the device. Further, the operation order may be notified by a combination of these configurations.

(28) Depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, a penalty may be given to the player. For example, when the operation is performed in an operation order different from the operation order notified at the time of winning the push order combination (when an operation for winning a combination different from the combination to be notified is performed). It may be configured to give a penalty, or the operation order is not notified when the push order combination is won, or the operation order is not notified when the push order combination is won. Nevertheless, if an operation in an operation order different from a predetermined operation order (for example, an operation order in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) is performed, a penalty may be given. As the penalty is given, for example, in the reel control process by the main control device 101, an operation subject to the penalty (a specific operation subject to a predetermined penalty) is performed based on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like. Whether or not it is specified, for example, the main control device 101 prevents the lottery of the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc. from being performed over a predetermined number of games, or the lottery of the number of continuous games such as the challenge mode and the attack mode is added. It is preferable to execute the penalty processing so that the lottery is not performed or the lottery is performed but the winning probability is lower than the situation where the penalty is not given.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to use the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify the penalty notification that the specific operation subject to the above-mentioned predetermined penalty has been performed. This notification may be performed by the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 can grasp that the specific operation has been performed by the command output when it is specified that the specific operation has been performed by the main control device 101, and the above-mentioned specific operation has been performed. Processing for performing penalty notification can be executed.

Then, for example, the main control device 101 performs the above-mentioned penalty processing when the specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, but does not perform the above-mentioned penalty processing when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. You may. The specific mode is a game mode in which the increase / decrease of medals does not occur by returning equal pieces, but if a penalty is given even in such a game mode, the penalty is given even though the increase / decrease of medals does not occur. This is because an event contrary to the significance of providing a specific mode such as being given can occur.

Further, in this case, the display control device 81 may be configured to perform the above-mentioned penalty notification when the specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and also to perform the above-mentioned penalty notification when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. good. By doing so, in a configuration in which the specific mode is set as the practice mode, it is possible to notify that a penalty will be given if such a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and practice. It is possible to improve the significance of the mode.

Further, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the content as the content of the penalty when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. The content notification may be a notification explaining that the lottery such as the attack mode is more disadvantageous than usual as described above. By doing so, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the specific mode as the practice mode.

(29) Although the normal game mode and the specific mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets, they may be realized by other configurations. For example, even if the number of bets is the same, when the changeover switch that can be switched between the first position and the second position is switched to the first position, the normal game mode can be executed and the switch is switched to the second position. In some cases, it may be possible to execute a specific mode. The changeover switch may be provided at a position where the player can perform the changeover operation (for example, the front surface of the slot machine 10), or may be provided at a position where the player cannot perform the changeover operation (for example, the back surface of the slot machine 10). good. Further, the normal game mode and the specific mode may be switched depending on the set value that makes the winning probability of each combination different in the lottery by the lottery means. Specifically, when the set value is 1 which is the lowest value or 3 which is the intermediate value, the specific mode may be executed, and when the set value is another set value, the normal game mode may be executed.

(30) The effective line between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to the above. For example, in the normal game mode, in a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, other straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines instead of the downward-sloping line L4, or a line in which a bend occurs even in the normal game mode. It may be configured as a valid line. Further, even in the specific mode, the straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines, or other bent lines may be set as effective lines. The number of effective lines in the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to one, and may be two or more, or the number of effective lines may be different in both game modes. If either or one of the effective lines of both game modes is composed of a plurality of effective lines, one of the effective lines may be overlapped in both game modes, and in this case, at least the effective lines of each other may be overlapped. Any configuration may include non-overlapping valid lines.

(31) Although the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform various effects, it may be configured to perform various effects by other effect means. For example, as a configuration in which various effects are performed with a so-called full-screen liquid crystal display panel having a game panel 25 provided so as to cover the entire display windows 26L, 26M, 26R while making each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible. Alternatively, the decorative panel 80 below the stop switches 42 to 44 may be configured to perform various effects, or a movable accessory or the like may be used to perform various effects.

(32) The BB state (1st BB, 2nd BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) as a bonus state, the CB state (CB, PCB), and the slot machine having each RT state have been described, but are limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine that does not have a BB state or a CB state, or it may be a slot machine that has other gaming states such as a regular bonus (RB) state or a single bonus (SB) state. good.

(33) In the normal game mode, it is possible to start by betting 3 to 1 medal, but it may not be possible to start by betting 1 or 2 medals. In this case, in the first embodiment, it is preferable to enable one bet by switching to the specific mode by operating the second effect switch 67, and in the second embodiment, the special addition flag is set to 1 It is good to be able to bet on one sheet. When these one-card bets are possible, other bets (three-card bet or two-card bet) may be disabled.

(34) As the privilege to be given, in addition to the privilege of shifting the gaming state and the privilege of re-gaming, the configuration is provided with the privilege of paying out medals, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration and is not limited to the configuration. Any configuration may be used as long as some privilege is given. For example, a prize other than the medal may be paid out instead of the privilege of paying out the medal. In particular, when the game is played in a specific mode as a free mode as in the first embodiment, the number of medals does not increase or decrease. Therefore, even if a large number of games are added, the number of medals does not increase. I can't expect it. Therefore, for example, when the number of pseudo acquisitions exceeds a predetermined number, a privilege such as displaying a rare image may be given.

(35) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop buttons in parallel and having four effective lines has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a reel and a corresponding stop button are described. It may be a slot machine provided with five in parallel or a slot machine having seven effective lines. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop buttons are required.

(36) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having ball throwing and ball payout functions such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. However, it is known that a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, for a slot machine, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. And the stop result of the reel is the internal lottery. When the result corresponds to the above-mentioned result, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 cards) and a second bet number (1 card, 2 cards) different from the first bet number are provided. Ori,
It is provided with an effective position setting means (a function of executing an effective line setting process by the main control device 101) for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means.
When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result (for example, the watermelon role as the 26th small role, replay) is provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means. Watermelon
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, a special as a 26P small winning combination) as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means. Watermelon role, special replay) is provided,
The privilege granting means
The lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the first specific pattern is set in the first effective position (downward right line L4) set by the effective position setting means corresponding to the first bet number. When the combination is stopped, the first privilege corresponding to the first specific result (for example, five medals at the time of winning a watermelon, replay) can be given.
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, and the first specific pattern is set at the second effective position (bending line L6) set corresponding to the second bet number by the effective position setting means. When the second specific pattern combination different from the combination is stopped, the second privilege corresponding to the second specific result (for example, one medal at the time of winning a special watermelon, replay) can be given.
When the second specific pattern combination is stopped at the second effective position on the orbiting body, the position is a position that is not set as an effective position by the effective position setting means when the number of bets is the second. It is characterized in that the symbol is attached so that the first specific symbol combination is stopped at a specific position set as the first effective position by the effective position setting means in the case of one bet number. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the game is played with the first bet number, if the first specific result is won, the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the first effective position and the first privilege is given. When a game is played with a second bet number different from one bet number, if a second specific result different from the first specific result is won, the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the first effective position and the first specific pattern combination is stopped. The second specific pattern combination is stopped at the second effective position, and the second privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to obtain different benefits with the same stop roll depending on whether the game is played with the first bet number or the second bet number. That is, even if the appearance is the same stop roll, it is possible to realize a game in which different benefits are given by playing games with different bets with one gaming machine. By doing so, it becomes possible to diversify the game.

Feature A2. As the first privilege, the privilege granting means can pay out a specific number of gaming media having the same number or more as the first bet number or execute a re-game, and the second privilege is the second. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the same number of gaming media as the number of bets can be paid out or replayed.

According to the above configuration, even if the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number have the same stop result in appearance, the game medium played with the first bet number is more than the bet number. While the payout or re-game can be given, in the game played with the second bet number, the same number of game media as the bet number is paid out or the re-game is given, and the increase in the game medium cannot be expected. In this way, by providing a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number, it is possible to standardize the outcome of the game based on both bet numbers. Even if they are similar to each other, it is possible to have completely different game characteristics, and it is possible to guarantee the significance of incorporating a plurality of game characteristics into one game machine.

Feature A3. When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a plurality of types of the second specific result are provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
When the lottery is performed by the lottery means when the second bet number is set in a predetermined state (normal gaming state), one of the plurality of types of the second specific result is won. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that it is set as such.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result winning is established, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out or the re-game is given. If any one of the second specific results or the re-game combination is won in the game, the game is played with the second bet number in the predetermined state, and the game medium is not increased or decreased. This makes it possible to use the game played with the second bet number as, for example, a practice game or as an effect in the game played with the first bet number. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game medium does not increase or decrease depending on the second bet number by utilizing the commonality of the outcome with the game by the first bet number.

Feature A4. As the first specific result, a transition result (for example, a third replay as the first promotion replays 1 to 4) in which the winning probability of a predetermined combination (replay) before and after the transition is different is provided.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the first specific symbol combination for transition as the first specific symbol combination stops at the first effective position, the gaming state is set to a predetermined state (RT). It is equipped with a transition means (a function to execute RT status processing by the main controller 101) that can be transitioned to the status).
As the second specific result, as the second privilege, a second payout result is provided in which the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second payout result and the second specific symbol combination for payout as the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the second effective position, the second bet number. It is a configuration in which the same number of game media are paid out as
The pattern is attached to the orbiting body so that when the second specific pattern combination for payout stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for transition stops at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet number, the transition result is won and the game state is shifted to the predetermined state in the game with the first bet number, which is reproduced by paying out the same number of game media as the second bet number. be able to. By doing so, for example, it is possible to simulate the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined state in the game with the first bet number in the game with the second bet number without increasing or decreasing the game medium. It becomes.

In addition, although the configuration is such that "payment of the same number of game media as the number of second bets" is performed as the "second privilege" corresponding to the "second payout result", "a predetermined number of game media" is used as the "second privilege". It may be configured such that "payout" is performed. Even with such a configuration, in order to experience the transition of the game state to a predetermined state in the game with the first bet number in the game with the second bet number, the game medium is given. Is possible.

Feature A5. First predetermined effect execution in which a predetermined effect (for example, an attack mode start effect) can be executed by a predetermined notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) based on the transition of the game state to the predetermined state by the transition means. Means (a function that performs processing for executing the attack mode start effect by the display control device 81) and
The lottery result by the lottery means performed in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is the second payout result, and the first specific pattern combination for transfer to the specific position. When the second specific pattern combination for payout stops at the second effective position, the second predetermined effect executing means (2) predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect by the predetermined notification means ( A function that performs processing for executing the display attack mode start effect on the display control device 81), and
The gaming machine according to the feature A4, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, in order to experience the transition of the game state to the predetermined state with the second bet number, a predetermined effect common to the effect is generated, and it is possible to make the experience more realistic. Will be. By doing so, the game characteristics for practice based on the second bet number can be made closer to the game characteristics based on the first bet number.

Feature A6. Identification means (stamp 65a, identification combination) that makes it possible to distinguish between the case where the predetermined effect is executed by the first predetermined effect executing means and the case where the predetermined effect is executed by the second predetermined effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that the object 65b) is provided.

According to the above configuration, whether the game is performed by the first bet number or the game is performed by the second bet number while the game is similar to both the first bet number and the second bet number. Can be identified by looking at the predetermined effect. By doing so, both games are clarified when, for example, the manager of the game hall confirms the ball output status, etc., while making the rolls by the orbiting body common and further standardizing the production. Can be distinguished.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the winning probability of the replaying combination changes before and after the transition as the predetermined combination.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to experience the transition to the so-called RT state as the transition to the predetermined state. As the game state shifts and the probability of the lottery result changes, in addition to the RT state where the re-game probability changes, a bonus state where the small winning combination probability changes is assumed, but in general, the bonus state is, for example, 7. It can be said that the specific symbols such as the symbols can be aligned and transferred, and it is easy to understand in appearance, and it can be said that the player is familiar with the transition to the bonus state with the specific symbols such as the 7 symbols aligned. On the other hand, the transition to the RT state is less familiar than the transition to the bonus state, and in many cases, the outcome at the time of transition is relatively difficult to recognize. Therefore, by applying the game property that allows the player to experience the transition of the gaming state with the second bet number to the transition of the RT state as in the configuration of the feature A4, the transition of the gaming state that is difficult to understand is experienced. It will be very useful to fully understand the playability.

Feature A8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result in which the predetermined combination (re-game) is won as the first specific result, and the first effective position is the predetermined combination as the first specific pattern combination. 1 When a specific pattern combination is stopped, a predetermined privilege (replay) corresponding to the predetermined result is given as the first privilege.
The lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second predetermined combination as the second payout result (for example, the combination of one out-of-order), and the predetermined combination of the second specific patterns at the second effective position. When the second specific symbol combination for the role (for example, the symbol combination for which the first lip small winning combination is established) is stopped, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out.
In the orbiting body, when the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination is stopped at the second effective position, the pattern is stopped so that the first specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination is stopped at the specific position. Is attached,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second predetermined combination, the first means (for example, the main means) for stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination at the second effective position. A function for executing a process for notifying the push order for establishing the first rip small winning combination when the control device 101 wins the first winning combination) and the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination A function for executing a process for notifying the push order for establishing a small winning combination when the primary control device 101 wins a winning combination of the first losing combination (for example, when the main control device 101 wins the winning combination of the first losing combination). ), The gaming machine according to any one of the features A4 to A7.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet number, the transition result is won in the game with the first bet number, and the probability of winning the predetermined combination changes and the probability of granting the predetermined privilege changes. The result of the second predetermined combination can be reproduced by stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination or not stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination at the time of winning. .. Moreover, if the second specific pattern combination for the second predetermined combination is stopped, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out. It is possible to experience without accompanying.

Feature A9. When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, the payout combination (for example, bell) in which the payout of the game medium is given as a privilege before and after the transition is won. The first specific transition result (first BB, second BB) in which the probability is different is provided.
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, the payout combination (for example, bell) in which the payout of the game medium is given as a privilege before and after the transition is won. A second specific transition result (first PBB, second PBB) with different probabilities is provided.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result, and the first specific symbol combination for specific transition as the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the first effective position, the gaming state is changed. It is possible to shift to the first specific state (bonus state), and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the second effective position is specified as the second specific pattern combination. Specific transition means that can shift the game state to the second specific state (special bonus state) when the second specific pattern combination for transition is stopped (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101). Equipped with
The pattern is attached to the orbiting body so that when the second specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, which is characterized by being

According to the above configuration, the first specific transition result and the second specific transition result as so-called bonuses are provided in both the first bet number and the second bet number games, respectively. Moreover, when the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the second specific pattern combination for specific transition, which is the prize for the second specific transition result, stops at the second effective position, the first specific transition As a result, the first specific pattern combination for specific transition, which is a prize, stops at a specific position. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the bonus winning when the bonus is won in the game with the second bet number appear as if it is a bonus winning in the game with the first bet number, and it depends on the second bet number. The playability of the game can be improved.

Feature A10. When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the second specific state is transferred based on the second specific transition result after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that, in the game until the end of the game, the number of gaming media exceeding the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is not paid out.

According to the above configuration, even if the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the second specific state is reached, the game medium cannot be expected to increase. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game based on the first bet number from the game based on the second bet number, and to strengthen the impression that the game based on the second bet number is a practice game.

In the above configuration, "when the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific transition result, and then the first specific transition result is obtained. On the premise that, in the game until the end of the first specific state that has been transferred based on the above, the game medium is paid out in a number exceeding the number of bets set by the bet number setting means. The difference between the 1 specific state and the 2 specific state can be clarified.

Further, if the relationship between the "first bet number" and the "second bet number" is "the second bet number is smaller than the first bet number", the second bet number can be transferred to the second bet number. 2 It is possible to make the player understand the specific state as a privilege according to the number of bets.

Feature A11. The first terminating means (set in step S613 by the main control device 101) for terminating the first specific state based on the fact that the number of game media paid out during the first specific state has reached the first predetermined number. A function to execute an affirmative determination process in step S1504 based on the number of remaining payouts becoming 0) and
A second termination means (main control device) that terminates the second specific state based on the fact that the number of gaming media paid out during the second specific state becomes a second predetermined number that is smaller than the first predetermined number. A function to execute an affirmative determination process in step S1504 based on the fact that the number of remaining payouts set in step S614 according to 101 becomes 0).
The gaming machine according to the feature A10, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends with a smaller number of payouts than the first specific state. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the second specific state in line with the game for practice by the second bet number, and as in the feature A9, the second specific state is substantially the game medium. Even if the increase is not expected, it is possible to terminate the second specific state earlier.

In the above configuration, for example, "when the first specific transition result is won or after the first specific state transition, the lottery of the lottery means by the second bet number is completed until the first specific state is completed. As a result, the second specific transition result is not won, and when the second specific transition result is won or after the transition to the second specific state, the first bet number is until the end of the second specific state. As a result of the lottery of the lottery means, the first specific transition result is not won. ”The significance of ending the second specific state earlier is enhanced. That is, in such a configuration, even if the bet number is set as the first bet number, the first specific transition result is not won until the second specific state is completed. Therefore, regardless of the increase or decrease of the game medium in the second specific state. This is because it is necessary to end the second specific state in order to play the game with the first bet number.

Feature A12. As a result of being able to win in the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means in the second specific state, the same number of gaming media as the second bet number is paid out. Is provided as a result that can be granted as the privilege, and a lottery by the lottery means in a situation where a specific bet number (3, first bet number) larger than the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is provided. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that, as a result of being able to win in, the payout of the same number of gaming media as the specific bet number can be granted as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific state ends with the second predetermined number of payouts, the game with the specific bet number is played earlier than the game with the second bet number. It is possible to terminate the second specific state. In particular, the game is a game in which the player wants to fully enjoy or experience the second specific state by making it possible to change whether or not to end early in the part that can be determined by the player's operation such as the number of bets. It is secured and it becomes possible to play the game while respecting the will of the player.

Feature A13. As a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means during the second specific state, a predetermined end result (PCB, SB) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the second termination means can terminate the second specific state based on the winning of the predetermined termination result.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends even if the predetermined end result is won. Therefore, for example, depending on the winning probability of the predetermined end result, the second specific state ends earlier than the second predetermined number. Can be. This makes it possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the second specific state in which the increase in the game medium cannot be expected continues for a long time.

Regarding the "predetermined end result", more specifically, "when the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition and the number of payouts of the gaming media after the transition reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state after the transition". Is the result that will be terminated. " In addition, regarding the "predetermined end result", "when the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition and the number of game media paid out after the transition reaches a predetermined number, or when the predetermined number of games are executed, the transition is made. The result may be that the later gaming state is terminated. "

Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature A12, it may be set that "the predetermined end result is set as a result of being able to win in the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the specific bet number is set". .. A player who sets a specific bet number by the bet number setting means can be regarded as having an intention to end the second specific state at an early stage, and in this case, the predetermined end result is won. With the configuration obtained, it is possible to end the game at an early stage according to the player's will, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of ending the game even though the player does not want to end the game at an early stage.

Feature A14. The drive control means is operated so as to stop the orbit of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing. It controls so that the winning pattern corresponding to the winning result stops at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the symbol corresponding to the second specific transition result is not stopped and the second specific symbol combination for specific transition is not formed, the second specific pattern combination is not formed. 2 It is provided with a reservation storage means (a function of setting a bonus winning flag in step S306 of the main control device 101 and a function of executing a negative determination process in step S609) to reserve and store the winning of the specific transition result.
In the lottery by the lottery means performed in the situation where the second specific transition result winning is reserved and stored in the reserved storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result that does not win the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A9 to A13.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the second specific transition result is reserved and stored, it is possible to aim and stop the pattern corresponding to the second specific transition result. That is, even if an attempt is made to win a prize for the second specific transition result that is reserved and stored, if the second specific result is won, the second specific transition result prize is established in the control that prioritizes the second specific result prize. It cannot be made to move to the second specific state. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to the second specific state.

Feature A15. In the reserved storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result, the symbol corresponding to the first specific transition result does not stop, and the first specific symbol combination for the specific transition is not formed. The gaming machine according to the feature A14, characterized in that the winning of the first specific transition result can be reserved and stored even in such a case.

If the first specific transition result is obtained and it is reserved and stored in a situation where the first bet number is playing a game that may be different from the above-mentioned trial version game in which the increase / decrease of the game medium is small, depending on the player. It is also conceivable to carry out the reserved situation with the second bet number instead of the first bet number. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the first specific transition result won by the first bet number can be won by the second bet number, the game quality of each bet number is not deteriorated. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game for winning a prize.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A15, wherein the second bet number is set to be smaller than the first bet number.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the first specific state that shifts with the first bet number and the second specific state that shifts with the second bet number smaller than that becomes clear. In particular, in the feature A14, the act of winning the first specific transition result with the second bet number is more likely to be performed in the situation where the first specific transition result is reserved and stored.

Feature A17. When the second specific transition result is won and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition is stopped at the effective position, the transition means is transferred to the second specific state, while the game medium is paid out at the time of the transition. Is not done,
In the second specific state, in the predetermined game in the second specific state, the number of game media having the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is added to the number of game media having the second bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A9 to A16, wherein the payout is set as one of the termination conditions of the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, since the game medium is not paid out at the time of winning the second specific transition result, the game medium may be lost at the time of transition to the second specific state. Therefore, assuming that the end condition of the second specific state is increased by the number of game media (second bet number) required at the time of winning the second specific transition result, the total from the transition to the second specific state to the end is calculated. It is possible to reduce the increase / decrease in the game medium. As a result, the game with the second bet number is shared with the stop result in the game with the first bet number as a game property in which the increase / decrease of the game medium is reduced even if the second specific state transition occurs. Can be enjoyed to the maximum.

Feature A18. In a game performed in a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first continuous performance is continuously performed across each game by a predetermined effect means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65). The production is set,
In a game performed in a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second continuous effect that is continuously performed across each game is set in the predetermined effect means. ,
A first continuous number storage means (continuous effect counter) for grasping the continuous number of the first continuous effect and a second continuous number storage means (continuous effect counter for display) for grasping the continuous number of the second continuous effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, which are characterized by having each.

According to the above configuration, the number of consecutive first continuous effects and the number of consecutive second continuous effects are separately grasped. Therefore, for example, a game based on the first bet number while the first continuous effect is being executed. Even if the game is switched from to the second bet number, or vice versa, the continuous number of each continuous production can be memorized, and when the game is returned to the original bet number, the game is continuous. It is possible to resume from the middle of the production.

Feature A19. A first effect mode in which an effect based on the first bet number is performed as an effect by a predetermined effect means (for example, an auxiliary display unit 65) based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (operation of the second effect switch 67). It is provided with a switching means (a function of executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) that can switch between a (normal game mode) and a second effect mode (specific mode) in which the effect based on the second bet number is performed. ,
One of the features A1 to A18, wherein the bet number setting means can set the first bet number and the second bet number without switching the effect mode by the switching means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the effect mode and entertain the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number in the effect mode suitable for each. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which the bonus is won at the time of so-called bonus winning, a bet number different from the bet number at the time of winning the bonus may be set, and even in such a case, the production mode is switched. If this happens, the player may feel annoyed. Therefore, by making it possible to set each bet number by the bet number setting means without switching the production mode, the game by each bet number can be fully enjoyed without feeling the above-mentioned troublesomeness. Can be entertained.

Feature A20. Based on the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section, during bonus), it is not a state in which the switching means cannot switch the effect mode or the switching means should switch the effect mode. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized in that it is provided with a restricting means (a function of executing processes such as steps S4603, S4604, S4703 to S4705 by the main control device 101) for executing a restrictive process for notifying the above.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that switching between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number should not be performed depending on the gaming state. For example, in an advantageous state managed by the number of games, if the game is consumed by another bet number, the number of games in the advantageous state may be eroded, and one bet number may be used. If the bonus is won, the bonus lottery may not be performed even if the game with the other bet number is played. Therefore, by providing the means for disabling the switching as described above, it is possible to avoid the event that the player loses due to the switching.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined gaming state to which the regulation processing is performed by the regulating means is a state advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature A20 can be suitably exhibited.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
A transition result (for example, first BB, first) corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the lottery means to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery by the lottery means can change as compared with before the transition. 2BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), and when a specific pattern combination (for example, 7 reds) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by the control device 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number (3 cards), a larger number of game media than the first bet number is paid out. The first specific result (for example, watermelon as the 26th small role) and the transition result are provided so that the player can perform or replay the game.
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number (1 piece) which is smaller than the first bet number, the second bet number is set. A game characterized in that a second specific result (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P small winning combination) and the above-mentioned transition result are provided so that the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out or the re-game can be executed. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the start operation means is operated with the bet number of the game medium as the first bet number, and the result of the lottery executed based on the operation is notified by the stop result of the pattern through the operation of the stop operation means. , If the result of the lottery is the first specific result, the number of bets can be obtained in a game machine capable of a series of games in which a larger number of game media than the number of bets can be acquired or re-games can be executed. By setting the second bet number different from the first bet number, a game in which the same number of game media as the bet number can be paid out or the second specific result or the transition result in which the re-game can be executed can be won. It will be possible to do. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game that is performed while expecting the acquisition of a game medium larger than the number of bets, but at the same time, it is possible to realize a game that is performed from a completely different viewpoint from the game. .. For example, by increasing the winning probability of the second specific result and the transition result, it is possible to realize a game in which the game medium does not increase or decrease (small), such that the game medium cannot be expected to increase, but the game medium does not decrease. However, even if the winning probability of the second specific result or the transition result is low, the number of the second bets is smaller than the number of the first bets, so that the operation of the start operation means can be performed with a smaller number of game media. It is also possible to execute a series of games such as orbiting the orbiting body, operating the stop operating means, and stopping the orbiting body. By doing so, it is possible to freely set the game regardless of the uniform number of bets, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature B2. In a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result is won, and the first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed at the effective position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is given.
As the second specific result,
A specific position that is not the valid position in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, and is the valid position in the situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. In addition, by stopping each orbiting body in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is formed, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning is given as a first correspondence result (for example, as a 26P small winning combination). Special watermelon) and
By stopping each orbiting body in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed at the specific position, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning is given. )When,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that is set to.

According to the above configuration, in the playability by the second bet number, the first predetermined pattern combination that is a prize in the game with the first bet number is formed, and the first predetermined pattern that is not a prize in the game with the first bet number. It is possible to give a privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning in either case where the pattern combination of is not formed. By doing so, in the game with the second bet number where the increase / decrease of the game medium is small, some patterns are aligned and the so-called winning prize is stopped as in each game, but some symbols are aligned and stopped. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the stopped rolls such that the winning rolls appear or the so-called out-of-rolls are stopped without being aligned, and the playability by the second bet number can be improved.

Feature B3. As the second specific result, when the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, each orbital body is stopped in a state where the first pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, and the first operation result is won. When (for example, a small combination of deviations) is established and the operation order of the stop operation means is a second operation order different from the first operation order, the second operation order different from the first pattern combination at the effective position is established. The operation order correspondence result (for example, special first) in which each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in the state where the pattern combination of the above is stopped and the second operation result winning (for example, the third lip small winning combination) different from the first operation result winning is established. 1 promotion replays 1 to 4) are provided,
The privilege granting means pays out the same number of gaming media as the second operation result winning when the first operation result winning is established, and the second betting number even when the second operation result winning is established. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, which is configured to pay out the same number of gaming media as the above.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet number, when the operation order correspondence result is obtained among the second specific results, the number of game media to be paid out does not change, but different pattern combinations stop depending on the operation order and different prizes are won. It becomes an aspect. By doing so, in the game based on the second bet number, the game performance is improved by increasing the number of winning modes to be larger than the types of winning results, while ensuring the game performance without increase / decrease (small) of the game medium. Can be done.

Feature B4. In a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result is won, and the first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed at the effective position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is given.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation order correspondence result and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the first predetermined as the first pattern combination at the effective position. When each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in a state where the pattern combination is formed, the first operation result winning is established, and when the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, the said effective position. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the second operation result winning is established by stopping each orbiting body in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed as the second pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the so-called out-of-order rolls and winning rolls in the first bet number are stopped by the operation order by the stop operation means. Although the benefits granted will not change even if any of the rolls is stopped, if the above is done, for example, by notifying or not notifying the first operation order for the winning roll, the prize will be won. It is possible to intentionally make a roll appear. As a result, the playability of the second bet number can be significantly improved.

Feature B5. In the situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the re-game result is won among the first specific results, and a predetermined combination of symbols for re-game corresponding to the re-game result is placed in the effective position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies in the formed state, the replay corresponding to the replay result winning is given.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation order correspondence result and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the replay predetermined as the first pattern combination at the effective position. When each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in a state where the pattern combination of the above is formed, the first operation result winning is established, and when the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, the effective position is set. Described in feature B3 or feature B4, wherein the second operation result winning is established by stopping each orbiting body in a state where the predetermined combination of symbols for replay is not formed as the second combination of symbols. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the so-called replay winning outcomes and the missed outcomes in the first bet number are stopped by the operation order by the stop operation means. Although the benefits granted will not change even if any of the rolls is stopped, if the above is done, for example, the first operation order for the roll that will be the replay prize may or may not be notified. Then, it is possible to intentionally make a roll that is a replay prize. As a result, the playability of the second bet number can be significantly improved.

Feature B6. As a game performed in a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, there are a high re-game state (for example, a second RT state) in which the probability of winning the re-game result is relatively high and low, and a low. The replay state (for example, the 1st RT state) is set, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation order correspondence result, the operation order notification means (for example, the display control device 81) can notify the first operation order by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is characterized by having a function of executing a push order combination process for a mode).

According to the above configuration, in the case of the operation order correspondence result, for example, if the first operation order is notified by the operation order notification means, a replay winning result in the game of the first bet number appears, and the first If the operation order is not notified, a missed result will appear in the game of the first bet number, and depending on the presence or absence of the notification, even in the game with the second bet number, the high re-gaming state or low in the game with the first bet number will appear. It is possible to reproduce the replay state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the game based on the second bet number.

Feature B7. When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a plurality of types of the second specific result are provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
In a predetermined state (normal gaming state), when the second bet number is set and the lottery is performed by the lottery means, one of the plurality of types of the second specific result and the transition result is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, which is characterized in that it is set as such.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result winning is established, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out or the re-game is given. Therefore, the second specification is performed in the game played with the second bet number. If any of the results is won, the game played with the second bet number does not increase or decrease the game medium. This makes it possible to use the game played with the second bet number as, for example, a practice game or as an effect in the game played with the first bet number.

Feature B8. In the game from when the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result to the end of the specific state shifted based on the transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the payout of a gaming medium exceeding the number of bets set by the betting number setting means is not performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the specific state is reached, the game medium cannot be expected to increase. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game based on the first bet number from the game based on the second bet number, and to strengthen the impression that the game based on the second bet number is a practice game.

Feature B9. When the transition result is won in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the transition means is transferred to the specific state. , The game medium is not paid out at the time of the transition.
In the specific state, in the predetermined game in the specific state, a number is paid out by adding the number of the game media of the second bet number to the number of game media of the bet number set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the above is set as one of the termination conditions of the specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the second bet number, since the game medium is not paid out at the time of winning the transition result, the game medium may be lost at the time of transition to the specific state. Therefore, assuming that the end condition of the specific state is increased by the number of game media (second bet number) required at the time of winning the transition result, the increase / decrease of the game medium is reduced when the total from the transition to the specific state to the end is increased. It becomes possible. As a result, the game based on the second bet number can be made to have a game property in which the increase / decrease of the game medium is reduced even if the specific state transition occurs.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
A transition result (for example, first BB, first) corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the lottery means to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery by the lottery means can change as compared with before the transition. 2BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), and when a specific pattern combination (7 reds) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (main control) for shifting the gaming state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by device 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 pieces) and a second bet number (1 piece), which is a number different from the first bet number, are provided.
When the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the lottery means draws a lottery for each combination including the transition result with the first lottery probability, and sets the bet number. When the bet number set by the means is the second bet number, the lottery of each winning combination including the transition result is performed with the second lottery probability.
In a predetermined state, the lottery of the lottery means is performed based on the ratio of the privilege to the number of bets when the lottery of the lottery means is performed based on the first lottery probability and the second lottery probability. The composition is different from the ratio of the privilege to the number of bets in the case of
A display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying game information including the privilege to be given, and
Identification means (stamp 65a, for identification) that enables the display means to identify that the game is being played with the first bet number and that the game is being played with the second bet number. Character 65b) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in both the case where the game is played with the first bet number and the case where the game is played with the second bet number, each role including the transition result that enables the transition to the specific state A lottery will be held. The so-called payout rate, which is the ratio of the privilege to the bet number, is different between the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number. By using such a gaming machine, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features having different ball ejection rates in one gaming machine, and one gaming machine can meet the needs of various players. Moreover, which of the games is being played can be identified by a display means capable of notifying the game information including the privilege. Therefore, for example, when confirming the game information including the obtained privilege, it becomes clear at a glance which bet number the game was played with, together with the privilege. It can be easily confirmed.

The payout rate is expressed as "the ratio of the privilege to the bet number", but for example, "the grant rate of the privilege for each game" and "a predetermined number of game media are paid out as a privilege". It may be expressed as "the rate of increase of the game medium for each game" or "the rate of decrease of the game medium for each game". Further, the number of games for calculating the payout rate may be "per predetermined number of games".

Further, "in a situation in which a predetermined state" may be a predetermined state among a plurality of types of gaming states set, such as during a bonus or an RT state, or these multiple types are set. It may be a state that includes any or all of the gaming states that are being played.

Feature C2. The identification means identifies the display information (normal game effect data) displayed by the display means when the game is played by the first bet number, indicating that the game is played by the second bet number. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number can be distinguished by superimposing information (production data for identification information).

According to the above configuration, the display information when the game with the first bet number is performed and the display information when the game with the second bet number is performed are provided as separate ones, and each of them is provided. Compared with the configuration that enables identification, it is only necessary to superimpose the identification information, so that the storage capacity of the display information stored in advance can be significantly reduced.

Feature C3. The display means displays image data for displaying the display information when the game with the second bet number is performed, and displays the display information when the game with the first bet number is performed. The gaming machine according to feature C2, which is characterized in that it is possible to display the identification information by superimposing the identification information while displaying the image data.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to store the image data for displaying the display information when the game with the second bet number is performed in advance, and the effect of the feature C2 can be more preferably performed. can.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the display means is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the orbiting body in the front-rear direction.

According to the above configuration, the discriminability by the identification means is not a concern when playing a game while looking at the orbiting body, and the orbiting body is not concerned when confirming the distinctiveness by looking at the display means. For example, it is assumed that some players take a picture and record it, for example, when a roll that does not stop easily stops at the orbiting body. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to take a picture without worrying about the reflection of the display means in the picture taking.

Feature C5. When the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number and the transition means shifts to the specific state, the circuit is stopped. The stop result of the pattern that stops at a position that can be visually recognized via the display unit is
It is characterized in that the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the same as the stop result when the transfer means shifts to the specific state in the situation where the second bet number is the second bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4.

According to the above configuration, the transition to a specific state in which the winning probability of each winning combination can be changed by the lottery means occurs due to the same stop roll in the case of the first bet number and the case of the second bet number. obtain. By doing so, even if the playability of each has a different payout rate, the transition of the game state is caused by the same roll, which makes it easier for the player to understand the playability and the payout rate is low. Even when playing a game on the side, it is possible to experience that the transition to a specific state has occurred due to the same roll as the roll on the side with a high payout rate, and it is also possible to provide a sense of satisfaction. It becomes.

On the other hand, if the same result is obtained, it can be said that it becomes more difficult for some game hall managers and the like to know which game is being played. In particular, the point at which the transition of the game state occurs is a point that the manager of the game hall can pay attention to. In that respect, as described in feature C1, since the display means can be identified, it is notified which game is being played at a position unrelated to the outcome of each orbiting body. While enjoying the effect of satisfaction to the player, the distinctiveness does not deteriorate.

Feature C6. In the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the first transition result (first BB, second BB) is the transition result to be transferred to the specific state by the transition means. Is provided,
In the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, the second transition result (first PBB, second PBB) is the transition result to be transferred to the specific state by the transition means. Is provided,
The probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first transition result in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the bet number setting means are set. Features C1 to C5 characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means becomes the second transition result in the situation where the bet number is the second bet number is set as the same probability. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a transition result (probability of a first transition result and probability of a second transition result) is determined between a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number having different payout rates. It is set as the same probability. Therefore, in the winning status of the transition result (the occurrence status of the specific state), it is difficult to distinguish between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number. In other words, even if the games have different ball output rates, both games can be treated as similar games. For example, one game can be treated as a trial version of the other game. .. And, as described in the feature C1, since both games are made to resemble each other and can be identified on the display means side, the confirmation work by the game hall can be easily performed.

In addition, by configuring "the benefits obtained differ between the specific state that migrates based on the first transition result and the specific state that migrates based on the second transition result", the winning probabilities of both transition results are the same. Even so, it is possible to secure configurations with different ball output rates.

Feature C7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result (for example, watermelon as the 26th small winning combination), the privilege granting means pays out the first specific number of game media as the privilege. ,
When the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is the first specific result in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the first specific number When the game medium is to be paid out, the same stop roll as the stop roll of the pattern that stops at a position recognizable through the display unit in the situation where each orbiter is stopped. However, if the bet number set by the bet number setting means is stopped in the situation where the bet number is the second bet number, a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the above configuration, the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number can be configured to be given different benefits with the same stop roll. As a result, the first bet number and the second bet number are common to each other by utilizing the roll of the orbiting body, which is an area different from the display means in which the distinctiveness is generated, while making it distinguishable by the identification means. It is possible to realize playability with different ball output rates while using.

Feature C8. A second specific result (for example, as a 26P small winning combination) in which the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is different from the first specific result when the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. In the case of the special watermelon), the second specific number of game media can be paid out.
The probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first specific result in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the bet number setting means are set. Described in feature C7, wherein the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means becomes the second specific result in the situation where the bet number is the second bet number is set as the same probability. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result in which the first specific number is paid out and the second specific result in which the second specific number is paid out are made to appear with the same probability while using a common result. be able to. As a result, the first bet number and the second bet number are common to each other by utilizing the roll of the orbiting body, which is an area different from the display means in which the distinctiveness is generated, while making it distinguishable by the identification means. It is possible to realize playability with different ball output rates while using.

Feature C9. The display means can display the number of payouts of the game medium as the payout number information by the privilege granting means when the game information including the privilege is notified.
When the second specific number of gaming media is paid out based on the second specific result, it is possible to display the payout number information assuming that the first specific number of gaming media has been paid out. The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized by being.

According to the above configuration, when the game information including the privilege is notified, the same payout number information can be displayed for the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number. As a result, even if the number of game media actually paid out is different and the payout rate is different, it is possible to experience the same game playability on the display. However, as described in the feature C1, when the game information is notified, it is possible to identify which game it is, so it is premised that it is a pseudo display, and it has such a premise. Therefore, it is considered that no problem can occur even if the display is different from the actual number of payouts as described above.

Feature C10. The display means can display information on the number of games executed as game number information when notifying game information including the privilege.
When the game is played by the first bet number, the game number information of the game played by the first bet number is displayed, and when the game is played by the second bet number, the game is concerned. The gaming machine according to feature C9, characterized in that information on the number of games played in the second bet can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, the payout number information is displayed in a pseudo manner, while the game number information is displayed corresponding to the actual number of games. This is because if the game number information is also displayed in a pseudo manner, the reliability of the notification of the game information is significantly lowered, and by displaying the same number of games as the number of games actually experienced by the player. , It becomes easy to imagine a pseudo payout number display.

Feature C11. The identification means identifies the display information (normal game effect data) displayed by the display means when the game is played by the first bet number, indicating that the game is played by the second bet number. By superimposing the information (effect data for identification information), it is possible to distinguish between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number.
The number of bets when the lottery means is drawn based on the second lottery probability, rather than the ratio of the privilege to the number of bets when the lottery of the lottery means is performed based on the first lottery probability. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the ratio of the privilege to the above-mentioned privilege is lower.

According to the above configuration, the game with the second bet number, which is the side with the low payout rate, is shown with respect to the display information when the game with the first bet number, which is the so-called high payout rate side, is performed. The identification information is superimposed. In other words, when the game with the first bet number is played, the identification information is not superposed. That is, when the game with the first bet number is performed, it can be said that it is possible to concentrate on the game with the first bet number without worrying about the other game. This is due to the idea that many players prefer to play games on the side with a high ball output rate, and by doing so, it is possible to create a gaming machine that meets the needs of many players. be able to.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of game media, and
The transition result (for example, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the lottery means to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes as compared with before the transition. ), And when a specific pattern combination (for example, red 7, red 7, watermelon alignment) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (main control device) that shifts the gaming state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The expected number of payouts (ball payout rate) of the game medium by the payout means for the bet number set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the specific state, and the normal number before the transition to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means with respect to the bet number set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the game state is equal to.

According to the above configuration, the number of payouts for the number of bets per game is set to be the same between the bonus state as a specific state that shifts based on the so-called bonus winning as a transition result and the normal gaming state before the bonus shift. ing. That is, even if the normal gaming state is changed to the bonus state, the advantage for the player does not change. For example, as a configuration that does not change the advantage, a pseudo state is generated by aligning and stopping bonus patterns in a predetermined start game, but the small winning probability does not change compared to before the transition to the bonus state. A configuration that generates a bonus state is also conceivable. However, in this case, the player feels the occurrence of the bonus state because the game state does not change at all and the small winning combination winning probability does not change only through the start game in which the bonus patterns can be aligned and stopped. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the above configuration, the probability of each role changes due to the transition to a specific state as a bonus. For example, if the winning probability of each role increases or the winning combination is won only during the bonus, a bonus is given. It is easy to experience the condition. With such a configuration, if the configuration does not change the advantage as described above, it is possible to experience the bonus state as a specific state in a simulated manner without giving profit to the player, and the game design. The degree of freedom of is greatly improved. Therefore, it is possible to suitably aim at the degree of attention of the game.

In addition, "equivalent" may include "same thing" and "not the same, but the same level of profit that the player can obtain".

Further, "the expected number of payouts (ball payout rate) of the game medium by the payout means with respect to the bet number set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the specific state, and before the transition to the specific state. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means with respect to the bet number set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the normal game state is equivalent to the above. The advantage in the specific state and the advantage in the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state are the same. "

Feature D2. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the expected number of payouts of the medium is equal to or less than the number of bets set by the bet number setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, it is not expected that the game medium will increase not only in the normal game state but also in the specific state. In other words, the game medium cannot be expected to increase even in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the player is allowed to experience the bonus as a specific state without giving a profit to the player.

Feature D3. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the expected number of payouts of the medium is the same as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, it can be expected that the same number of game media as the number of bets will be paid out in each game in the normal game state and the specific state. That is, although the increase in the game medium cannot be expected in each game, the decrease in the game medium does not occur. In this way, by making the game playability that does not increase or decrease the game medium, it is possible to realize the playability for practice, for example, for understanding the specifications of the game machine.

Feature D4. As a lottery result executed by the lottery means, a plurality of payout combinations and re-game combinations to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means are provided, and when the lottery by the lottery means is performed, any of the above It is a configuration that wins the payout combination or the replaying combination.
The payout means is a privilege corresponding to the payout combination winning when the lottery result in the lottery means is the payout combination winning and a specific pattern combination corresponding to the payout combination winning stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the payout of the same number of gaming media as the number of bets set by the betting number setting means is executed.

According to the above configuration, a so-called deviation result is not set, and the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out or the replay is executed in each game. For example, in a configuration in which there is no increase or decrease in the game medium when a plurality of games are averaged, there are a state in which the game medium is decreasing and a state in which the game medium is increasing, and the playability of the feature D1. There may be advantages and disadvantages for the player in realizing the above. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the game medium does not increase or decrease in each game, the player can feel free to experience the game without causing an advantageous situation or a disadvantageous situation. Can be done.

Feature D5. The drive control means is operated so as to stop the orbit of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing. It controls so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result stops at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the symbol corresponding to the transition result does not stop forming a predetermined combination of symbols at the effective position, the reserved storage means for retaining and storing the transition result winning ( It has a function to execute the process of setting the bonus winning flag in the main control device 101).
In the lottery by the lottery means performed in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved and stored in the reserved storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result in which none of the plurality of payouts is won. The gaming machine according to the feature D4.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the migration result is reserved and stored, it is possible to aim and stop the specific pattern corresponding to the migration result. In other words, even if you try to win the transition result that you have reserved, if you win another payout, you cannot establish the transition result winning in the control that gives priority to the winning combination, and you will be in a specific state. It will not be possible to migrate. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to a specific state.

Feature D6. As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed in the specific state and the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state The first bet number (1 card) equal to the expected payout number of the game medium by the payout means per game to be executed, and the second bet number different from the first bet number. The number (3 sheets) is provided,
In the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the expected number of payouts of the game medium and before the transition to the specific state. The configuration is such that the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during a certain normal game state is not equivalent.
The transition result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means of the game performed by the second bet number.
In the reserved storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means of the game performed by the second bet number is the transition result, and the specific pattern corresponding to the shift result forms a predetermined combination at the effective position and stops. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the winning result of the transition can be reserved and stored even if the game is not performed.

In the situation where the second bet number is playing a game that may be different from the above-mentioned trial version game in which the increase / decrease of the game medium is small, if a transition result is obtained and the reserved memory is stored, the reserved memory may be used depending on the player. It is also conceivable to carry out the situation with the first bet instead of the second bet. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the transition result won by the second bet number can be won by the first bet number, the winning is established without deteriorating the game quality of each bet number. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game to be played.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the first bet number is set to be smaller than the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, since the first bet number is smaller than the second bet number, the loss of the game medium is minimized in the situation where the transition result is reserved and stored in the second bet number. If the transition result winning is to be established, it is assumed that the transition result winning is established by the first bet number instead of the second bet number. Therefore, the scene where the effect of the feature D6 is exhibited is more likely to occur, and the merit of having the configuration of the feature D6 can be increased.

Feature D8. The drive control means is operated so as to stop the orbit of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing. It controls so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result stops at the effective position.
In each of the orbiting bodies, the specific pattern corresponding to the transition result is arranged so as to be able to stop at the effective position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means.
The transition means is characterized in that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result, and the specific pattern is configured to shift to the specific state by forming a predetermined combination at the effective position and stopping. Features The gaming machine described in D4.

According to the above configuration, the game property of aiming at a specific pattern and stopping it in the case of the transition result is lost, but since it is not reserved and stored as in the feature D5, the game medium is equal to the number of bets at the time of reserved storage. The event that the loss occurs does not occur.

Feature D9. As the plurality of payouts, a first payout (for example, a special bell as a first P small win) and a second payout (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P small win) are set.
The payout means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first payout combination winning and the first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first payout combination winning stops at the effective position, the first payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is paid out, and the payout is performed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second payout combination winning and the second predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second payout combination winning stops at the effective position, the second payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, it is configured to execute the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D8, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and in any payout combination winning, the first payout combination is won in the game performance in which the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out and the game medium does not increase or decrease. The first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination constituting the second payout winning combination and the second payout winning combination are configured to be visually distinguishable. Therefore, it is possible to cause variations in the stop rolls of the orbiting body in each game, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored even if the game playability does not increase or decrease the game medium regardless of which payout combination is won. It will be possible.

Feature D10. As the plurality of payouts, a first payout that can be won during the normal gaming state (for example, a special bell as the first P small win) and a third payout that can be won during the specific state (for example, the 32P small). Special BB small and medium-sized role 1) as a role is set,
The payout means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first payout combination winning and the first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first payout combination winning stops at the effective position, the first payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is paid out, and the payout is performed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third payout combination winning, and the third predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second payout combination winning stops at the effective position, the third payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, it is configured to execute the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D9, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the third predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and in any payout combination winning, the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out and the game media do not increase or decrease. The first predetermined pattern combination that constitutes the first payout winning combination that occurs and the third predetermined pattern combination that constitutes the third payout winning combination that occurs during the specific state are configured to be visually distinguishable. There is. Therefore, it is possible to generate variations in the stop rolls of the orbiting body in each game between the normal game state and the specific state, and even if the expected number of game media is the same, the game state has changed. It is possible to make it easier.

Feature D11. As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed in the specific state and the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state The first bet number (1 card) equal to the expected payout number of the game medium by the payout means per game to be executed, and the second bet number different from the first bet number. The number (3 sheets) is provided,
In the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and before the transition to the specific state. One of the features D1 to D10 characterized in that the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during a certain normal game state is not equal to each other. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, while the novel playability of the above feature D1 is realized in the first bet number, if the second bet number is different from the first bet number, the payout is expected in the specific state and the normal game state. It is possible to realize a general game in which the numbers are different. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of playability with one gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the games.

In this case, for example, if the game playability in which the game medium can be increased or decreased realized by the second bet number can be experienced by the first bet number, the game by the first bet number is the second bet number. It will be possible to provide it as a practice for playing games. As a result, the game with the second bet number is a novel and complicated game, and even if the fun is difficult to understand in the first game, it is fun to practice with the first bet number first. It is possible to fully enjoy the game with the second bet number.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of game media, and
The transition result (for example, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the lottery means to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes as compared with before the transition. ), And when a specific pattern combination (for example, red 7, red 7, watermelon alignment) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (main control device) that shifts the gaming state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 pieces) and a second bet number (1 piece), which is a number different from the first bet number, are provided.
In a game played in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, it is determined whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result is satisfied. Condition determination means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a process of determining the presence / absence of a special addition flag by the main control device 101) and
A predetermined game is performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied, and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. In the first effect means (main control device 101 in the second embodiment, for example, the processes of steps S5520 and steps S5704 and S5705), the first effect means (the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc.) can execute the first specific effect. Function to execute) and
The game is performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. For example, in the second effect means (main control device 101 in the second embodiment), which can execute a second specific effect different from the first specific effect by a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.). (Function to execute processing such as step S5521, step S5712, S5713, and processing for special addition) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first bet number and the second bet number can be set, the game is played with the first bet number, the specific condition is satisfied, and then the game is played with the second bet number. A different effect is generated depending on whether the game is played with the first bet number or the game is played with the first bet number but the specific condition is not satisfied. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the range of games of a gaming machine in which a plurality of bets can be set. That is, it is significantly different from the uniform game playability in which a game is always played with the first bet number as in a conventional gaming machine. For example, after a specific condition is satisfied at the time of a game with the first bet number, the second bet is made. It is possible to realize the playability of playing a game by number.

Feature E2. The situation where the specific condition is determined by the condition determination means and the situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied are set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the winning probability of each winning combination by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number is the second bet number is the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of each winning combination by the lottery means in the game played with the second bet number does not change regardless of the success or failure of the specific condition. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the effects different between the first effect means and the second effect means without changing the gaming state or the like. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the production is improved, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention.

Feature E3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out. 2 payout roles (for example, special watermelon as the 26th P small role) and replay role (special replay) are provided.
At least in a situation where it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied, a lottery by the lottery means is performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. If so, the gaming machine according to the feature E1 or the feature E2, which is set to win either the second payout combination or the replaying combination.

According to the above configuration, at least in a game played with a second bet number when a specific condition is satisfied, the game medium does not increase or decrease. By doing so, it is possible to position the game with the second bet number as a game for staging, and it is possible to suitably realize a novel staging with different bets within the range that does not cause a loss to the player. can.

Feature E4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the first specific number of game media having the second bet number or more is paid out. The first payout role (for example, watermelon as the 26th small role) to be played is provided.
The specific condition is that in a game played in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first payout combination winning. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which can be satisfied as one condition.

According to the above configuration, in order to play a game with a second bet number based on the establishment of a specific condition, the player has a game medium with a second bet number even though the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, the inconvenience of not being able to see the second specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition is less likely to occur. That is, the game medium having the second bet number or more should be paid out based on the first payout winning combination winning / winning that triggered the establishment of the specific condition.

Feature E5. A first payout combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. Ori,
A second payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. And
The stop roll of each of the orbitals when the first payout winning combination is established is set to be the same as the stop roll of each of the orbitals when the second payout winning combination is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, a first payout combination that is won in a game with a first bet number that satisfies a specific condition, and a second payout combination that is won in a game with a second bet number that can be executed after the specific condition is satisfied. The stop rolls are common. By doing so, the game played with the second bet number can be made to resemble the game with the first bet number, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the game playability in which each bet number goes back and forth.

Feature E6. A first payout combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. Ori,
The specific condition is that the first payout combination is won and the lottery by the second lottery means (a function of executing the special addition lottery process by the main control device 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, which is characterized in that it is established based on the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not satisfied only by winning the first payout combination at the time of the first bet number, but is established when the lottery by the second lottery means is won. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability of establishment of the specific condition without lowering the appearance rate of the first payout combination, and it is possible to increase the rarity of the second specific effect by the second effect means. In addition, by doing the above, even if the first specific combination is won, there will be cases where the specific conditions are satisfied and cases where the specific conditions are not satisfied, and there are various production settings when the first specific combination is won. It can also be converted.

Feature E7. By winning the lottery by the second lottery means, a second privilege (for example, an addition of the number of games in the attack mode) different from the privilege by paying out the game medium is given. The gaming machine according to the feature E6.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the lottery by the second lottery means is improved, and if the second privilege is given, the specific condition is satisfied, and the second specific effect is performed by the second effect means. Therefore, the significance of the second specific production is also improved.

Feature E8. By the lottery means performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. The description according to the feature E7, wherein the feature E7 is provided with a means (a function of executing a special addition process by the main control device 101) capable of determining the type of the second privilege to be granted based on the lottery result. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the game played with the second bet number is improved. That is, it is determined that the second privilege will be granted by winning the second lottery means at the time of winning the first specific combination, and the second bet number will be granted in the subsequent game of the second bet number. 2 The type of benefits is decided. By doing so, the fun of the game by the second bet number is improved.

Feature E9. In a situation where it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery means is based on the first bet number instead of the second bet number set by the bet number setting means. When the lottery is performed by, it is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for normal addition by the main control device 101) capable of determining the type of the second privilege to be granted based on the lottery result. The gaming machine according to the feature E8.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a specific condition is satisfied and the type of the second privilege can be determined in the game with the second bet number, the game with the first bet number is played instead of the game with the second bet number. In this case, since the type of the second privilege is determined using the lottery result of the game based on the first bet number, the inconvenience that the second privilege is not given is avoided.

Feature E10. A means that can determine the type of the second privilege to be granted by using the lottery result by the lottery means based on the first bet number that triggered the establishment of the specific condition (based on the additional opportunity by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature E8 or feature E9, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of determining the number of special additional games.

According to the above configuration, not only the game after the specific condition is satisfied, but also the result of the game that triggered the establishment of the specific condition is reflected in the type of the second privilege. As a result, the continuity of a series of games in which a specific condition is satisfied in the game based on the first bet number and then the second privilege is given mainly in the game based on the second bet number becomes the type of the second privilege. It will be reflected, and it will be possible to realize a novel game property, which is a privilege granting system that takes into account the continuity of the game with different bets.

Feature E11. The second specific effect by the second effect means is characterized in that it can occur even in a game performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number is played, the second specific effect is the first in a configuration in which a second specific effect can occur. Since it can occur even in a game based on the number of bets, it is difficult to understand whether the game in which the second specific effect occurs is executed with the first bet number or the second bet number. be able to. As a result, in the game property realized by switching the number of bets, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of bets and pay attention to the whereabouts of the game (for example, the type of the second privilege to be given).

Feature E12. A first payout combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. Ori,
The specific condition is that the first payout combination is won and the lottery by the second lottery means (a function of executing the special additional lottery process by the main control device 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means is won. It is established based on
When the lottery by the second lottery means performed in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number is not won, the second specific effect can be executed. The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that it is provided with various means (a function of executing a process for normal addition by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition to which the second privilege is granted is not satisfied, the second specific effect may occur in the game played with the first bet number. Therefore, it is difficult to understand whether the second specific effect was performed based on the game based on the second bet number executed by satisfying the specific condition or based on the failure of the specific condition. Can be done. As a result, in the game property realized by switching the number of bets, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of bets and pay attention to the whereabouts of the game (for example, the type of the second privilege to be given).

Feature E13. As the receiving means, there are a plurality of second bet number receiving means capable of accepting the virtual game medium of the second bet number.
The second staging means is a situation in which the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means, and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. When the virtual gaming medium of the second bet number is accepted by the operation of the first second bet number accepting means among the plurality of second bet number accepting means in the game performed in When the virtual gaming medium of the second bet number is accepted by the operation of the second second bet number accepting means different from the first second bet number accepting means while executing the second specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized in that the first specific effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, among the plurality of second bet number accepting means, the second specific effect is executed when the first side is operated, while the first specific effect is executed when the second side is operated. Will be executed, and it will be possible to make the production different depending on the second bet number receiving means to be operated. For example, even if the operation of the first side is urged when a specific condition is satisfied, it is a matter for the player to decide which operation to perform, and the second side operates contrary to the operation instruction of the first side. If so, the structure will respect the player's decision-making. As a result, the circling body is rotated by one's own operation to start the game, and the lap of the orbiting body is stopped by one's own operation to end the game. It becomes possible.

Feature E14. Having a plurality of the starting operation means,
Described in the feature E13, the feature E13 is characterized in that the player receives the operation force of the first second bet number receiving means and operates a predetermined start operation means among the plurality of start operation means. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the first second bet number receiving means, the operation of the predetermined starting operation means is also performed, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means are performed in conjunction with each other. Therefore, operability is improved. In this case, as the second bet number receiving means, not only the one on the first side and the one on the second side are provided as described above, but also a plurality of starting operation means are provided. It can be said that the player can select whether or not to use the configuration in which the operation is performed. Therefore, the game can be suitably executed without imposing the effect against the player's will.

In the above configuration, "the acceptance operation unit in which the operation of the first second bet number acceptance means is performed and the start operation unit in which the operation of the predetermined start operation means is performed are provided adjacent to each other, and the above-mentioned configuration is provided. If the receiving operation unit and the starting operation unit are operated in a common operation direction, the player can operate both operation units at the same time.

Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that "when the receiving operation unit is operated in the operation direction, it has an interlocking unit that presses the start operation unit in the operation direction".

Feature E15. A game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the above-mentioned game. Identification of a game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. Features E1 to E14 characterized by being provided with means for reducing the performance (a function of executing a process of setting a bet time effect, payout appearance, etc. when a special addition flag is set by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, in a game property in which the number of bets is exchanged in a situation where a specific condition is satisfied, the exchange of the number of bets is obscured and the whereabouts of the game (for example, the second privilege to be given) are obscured. It is possible to pay attention to the type of).

Feature E16. As a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, a payout combination and a re-game combination in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out are set. And
When the lottery result by the lottery means performed in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number is the payout combination, it is established from the state where the specific condition is satisfied. Features E1 to E15 characterized in that it is possible to maintain the state in which the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is the replaying combination. The gaming machine according to any one of.

The re-gaming role is a role that enables the game to be executed with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the current game without requiring a new game medium as a privilege at the time of winning, for example, the second bet. If a player wins or wins a replay in a number-based game, he or she may be forced to play the next game with a second bet. Therefore, according to the above configuration, when a replaying combination is won in a game with a second bet number based on the establishment of a specific condition, the next game must also be played with the second bet number. Even if it becomes, since the state in which the specific condition is satisfied is maintained, for example, the player is allowed to play the game with the second bet number even though the specific condition is not satisfied. There is no need to play a useless game.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of game media, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first specific combination (for example, a replay in a normal gaming state in the first embodiment, a watermelon combination as, for example, a 26th small combination in the second embodiment) and the first specific combination. A second specific combination (for example, in the first embodiment, the first lip small combination in the normal gaming state, and in the second embodiment, for example, a special watermelon combination as the 26P small combination) is provided, which has a higher winning probability than the combination. Has been
The first specific situation in which the first specific role winning can be established (the situation in which the re-game winning is established in the normal game mode, the situation in which the watermelon role winning is established), and the second in which the second specific combination winning can be established. 2 Specific means for reducing the distinctiveness from a specific situation (a situation in which the first lip small winning combination is established in a specific mode or a situation in which a special watermelon winning combination can be won) (for example, in the second embodiment, a special addition is added). A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function (function of setting a sound effect at the time of betting three sheets at times).

According to the above configuration, the distinction between the first specific situation in which the first specific combination can be won and the second specific situation in which the second specific combination can be won is reduced, so that the first specific combination is awarded. It becomes difficult to tell whether the second specific role has won a prize. Since the second specific combination has a higher winning probability than the first specific combination, for example, by making the frequently occurring second specific combination winning look like the less frequently occurring first specific combination winning, the first It is possible to make the player think that the first specific role winning is occurring frequently without increasing the winning probability of the first specific role too much. In this way, by reducing the distinctiveness between the roles having different winning probabilities, it is possible to realize a novel playability by combining these roles.

Feature F2. In the first specific situation, when the first specific winning combination is to be established, the pattern that stops at a position that can be visually recognized via the display unit in the situation where each orbiting body is stopped. The stop roll is
The gaming machine according to feature F1, which is characterized by having the same roll as the stop roll when the second specific winning combination is to be established in the second specific situation.

According to the above configuration, the stop result at the time of winning the first specific combination and the stop result at the time of winning the second specific combination are the same stop result. That is, a so-called slot in which the orbiting of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the orbiting body is stopped by the operation of the stop operation means, and the winning of each winning combination is established as a stop result according to the lottery result. With respect to the stop result, which is the key to the playability of the machine, the first specific combination prize and the second specific combination prize can be made common. As a result, in order to reduce the distinctiveness of each specific effect by the specific means, since the stop result of each game is the same in the first place, it is possible to make it easy to think that both specific roles are the same.

Feature F3. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number (3).
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number different from the first bet number. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the above configuration, the first specific winning combination and the second specific winning combination having different winning probabilities can be used properly depending on the difference in the number of bets. As a result, in the first specific situation where the first specific winning combination can be established and the second specific situation where the second specific winning combination can be established, the game performance such as the lottery probability is not involved in the transition of the gaming state. Can be completely different. Moreover, since the distinctiveness is lowered between the first specific situation and the second specific situation as in the feature F1, it is difficult for the player to realize that such completely different playability is exchanged. , It is possible to realize a novel playability by utilizing the exchange of the playability.

Features F4. It is provided with a receiving effect executing means (a function of executing a process for betting effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing a receiving effect based on the acceptance of the game medium or the virtual game medium by the receiving means.
The specific means distinguishes between the acceptance effect executed by the acceptance effect execution means in the first specific situation and the acceptance effect executed by the acceptance effect execution means in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is characterized in that it can be lowered.

According to the above configuration, the first identification is made by lowering the distinctiveness between the first specific situation and the second specific situation from the effect at the start of the game that the game medium or the virtual game medium is accepted by the receiving means. It is possible to make it difficult to realize the situation where different roles such as the winning combination and the second specific winning combination can be won, and it is possible to suitably realize the playability described in the feature F1.

Feature F5. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number (3).
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number different from the first bet number.
The specific means is said to be the first by executing the acceptance effect corresponding to the first bet number by the acceptance effect execution means when the acceptance is performed by the acceptance means corresponding to the second bet number. 1 The gaming machine according to feature F4, which is characterized in that the distinctiveness between the specific situation and the second specific situation is lowered.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to understand whether the game in which the first specific combination can be won in the first bet number or the game in which the second specific combination can be won in the second bet number by the acceptance effect. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bet number is used in the game, that is, which specific winning combination can be won, while the winning combination is different depending on the number of bets.

Feature F6. A virtual game medium number display means (credit display unit 60) that displays the number of virtual game media that can be accepted by the acceptance means, and
An update means (in / out of the number of bets by the main control device 101) for updating the display of the number of virtual game media by the virtual game medium number display means based on the reception of the virtual game medium by the receiving means. Counter processing: Function to execute step S109) and
Equipped with
The specific means may make the number of virtual gaming media invisible or difficult to see by the virtual gaming medium number display means based on the establishment of the specific condition (set of the special addition flag) that causes the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature F5, which is characterized by being possible.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the number of bets by the bet number setting means is different between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, the visibility of the number of virtual game media that can be used for setting the bet number is also reduced. , The distinctiveness between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is lowered. By doing so, the fact that different bet numbers are set by the bet number setting means is clearly expressed by updating the display of the number of virtual game media, and the event that which bet number is clarified becomes clear. It can be avoided.

Feature F7. A payout number display means (payout number display unit 62) for displaying the payout number of the game medium to be paid out by the payout means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the specific means can make the number of payouts by the payout number display means invisible or difficult to see based on the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific situation is generated, not only the display of the number of virtual game media but also the visibility of the display of the number of payouts is lowered. Generally, these displays are arranged side by side, and if the visibility of only one of the displays is reduced, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by reducing the visibility of both of these displays, it is possible to effectively exert the effect of the feature F6 without giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature F8. The feature is that the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first specific winning combination prize is different from the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the paying out means based on the second specific winning combination winning prize. The gaming machine described in F7.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific combinations have different payout numbers, the visibility of the payout number display is reduced in the first place as described in the feature F7. Therefore, in the configuration of the feature F7, the payout number is displayed. You can also enjoy the effect of making it difficult to understand which specific role winning prize was established.

Features F9. As the receiving means, a plurality of specific receiving means (second credit insertion switch 57 for one bet, fourth credit insertion switch 69, fifth credit insertion switch 75) that can be operated in the second specific situation are provided.
When the virtual gaming medium is received by the operation of the first specific receiving means among the plurality of specified receiving means in the second specific situation, the specific means is said to be the first by the receiving effect executing means. 1 When the virtual gaming medium is accepted by the operation of the second specific acceptance means different from the first specific acceptance means while the acceptance effect which is the object of reducing the distinctiveness from the specific situation is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, wherein the acceptance effect execution means is used to perform the acceptance effect that is not a target for reducing the distinction from the first specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, when the first side of the plurality of second bet number accepting means is operated, the acceptance effect in which the distinction from the first specific situation is lowered is performed, and the second is performed. When the side is operated, the acceptance effect is performed so that the distinctiveness from the first specific situation is not deteriorated. By doing so, the range that does not deviate from the real pleasure of the slot machine game is that the orbiting body is rotated by one's own operation to start the game, and the orbiting body is stopped by one's own operation to end the game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the effect of reducing the distinctiveness.

Feature F10. It is provided with a payout appearance execution means (a function of executing a process of setting payout appearances by the main control device 101) capable of executing payout appearances and payouts according to the number of payouts based on the payout of the game medium by the payout means. ,
The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first specific winning combination prize and the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the second specific winning combination winning are different.
The specific means is based on the payout appearance executed by the payout appearance execution means based on the first specific combination winning in the first specific situation and the second specific combination winning in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that it is possible to reduce the distinctiveness from the payout appearance execution means executed by the payout appearance execution means.

According to the above configuration, the distinction between the payout appearances of the first specific role and the second specific role, which differ in the number of payouts, is reduced. Becomes difficult to understand. Thereby, the playability of the feature F1 can be suitably realized.

Features F11. A first specific number of game media is paid out by the payout means based on the first specific combination prize, and a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out based on the second specific combination prize. It is configured to be paid out by the above-mentioned payout means.
The specific means has the first specific situation and the second specific situation by executing the payout appearance payout corresponding to the one specific number of payouts by the payout appearance payout execution means based on the second specific combination winning. The gaming machine according to the feature F10, which is characterized in that the distinction between the two and the pachinko machine is reduced.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature F10 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F12. The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number.
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than the same number as the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, for example, in the case of a configuration having a function of crediting a virtual game medium, when the second specific winning combination is established, it becomes difficult to actually pay out the game medium. That is, in order to establish the second specific winning combination, the virtual game medium of the second bet number is accepted by the receiving means, and as a result, the game medium of the second specific number which is equal to or less than the second bet number. It is considered that the second specific number of game media is within the above credits even if the above credits are obtained. As described above, since the game medium is not actually paid out, the payout appearance alone can have the effect of lowering the distinctiveness.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, wherein the starting operating means is operated by receiving the operating force of the receiving means by the player.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the receiving means, the starting operation means is also operated, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means are performed in conjunction with each other, so that the operability is improved. By doing so, a time lag between the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means is less likely to occur, and the orbiting body is started without giving time for the receiving means to recognize the number of virtual game media accepted. It becomes possible. Therefore, in a configuration in which the first specific combination and the second specific combination are used properly depending on the difference in the number of bets as in feature F3, the distinctiveness of the number of bets is lowered, and either the first specific combination or the second specific combination is won. It becomes possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not has occurred.

In the above configuration, "the receiving operation unit in which the receiving operation is operated and the starting operation unit in which the starting operation means is operated are provided adjacent to each other, and the receiving operation unit and the starting operation unit are provided. If the operation direction to be operated is standardized, the player can operate both operation units at the same time.

Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that "when the receiving operation unit is operated in the operation direction, it has an interlocking unit that presses the start operation unit in the operation direction".

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the bet number set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 cards) and a second bet number (1 card, 2 cards) different from the first bet number are provided. Ori,
It is provided with an effective position setting means (a function of executing an effective line setting process by the main control device 101) for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means.
When the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the first effective position (right-down line L4) set by the effective position setting means and the bet number setting means are set. The second effective position (bending line L6) set by the effective position setting means in the situation where the bet number to be played is the second bet number is set to include a specific position which is an effective position that does not overlap with each other. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to relate the game of the first bet number and the game of the second bet number by using the specific position. That is, the specific position included in the first effective position side does not overlap with the second effective position, and the specific position included in the second effective position side does not overlap with the first effective position. By utilizing such a relationship, for example, in a game played with the first bet number, a predetermined result is won by stopping a predetermined pattern combination at a specific position, while a game played with the second bet number. In, even if the predetermined symbol combination is stopped at the position where the predetermined symbol combination that is the predetermined result winning is stopped in the first bet number, the position is valid in the game played with the second bet number. Since it is not a position, it will not be a prize as a predetermined result. However, apparently, in the game played with the first bet number, the predetermined result is a winning result, so it is as if the predetermined result winning was established in the game played with the second bet number. It is possible to pretend. The reverse is also true, and if such a specific position that does not overlap between the first effective position and the second effective position is used, a result that wins on one side but does not win on the other side appears as described above. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by utilizing the commonality of the outcomes.

Feature G2. The first effective position is composed of a first specific position (bending line L4) that does not overlap with the second effective position, and the second effective position is a second specific position (bending line L6) that does not overlap with the first effective position. ), The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first effective position and the second effective position are set so that there is no overlapping effective position.

According to the above configuration, there is no overlapping effective position between the first effective position and the second effective position. If there are overlapping effective positions, for example, in the case of trying to stop a stop roll that is a predetermined result in a game played with the first bet number in a game played with the second bet number. , The pattern combination corresponding to the result of the game of the second bet number stops at the overlapping effective position, so that the rule of the outcome to be set (the outcome of the game according to the first bet number and the second bet) There may be an inconvenience that the rule of standardizing the outcome of the game by number) is broken. Therefore, by preventing the overlapping effective positions as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature G1 while preventing such an inconvenience from occurring.

Feature G3. The effective position is a position that can be visually recognized via the display unit, and there is one stop position at which the pattern attached to each orbiting body can be stopped, and one stop position for each of the orbiting bodies. It is set as a line that is a combination of each.
The first specific position is set as a line that becomes a straight line when the stop positions are combined, while the second specific position is set as a bending line that bends when the stop positions are combined. Features The gaming machine described in G2.

In a gaming machine in which a plurality of orbitals are stopped and the result is notified by a combination of the symbols attached to the plurality of orbitals, the symbols corresponding to the winning combination are stopped in a straight line as the combination of the symbols. It is easier for the player to understand the winning combination than when the player stops at the bending line. Based on such a premise, in the case of the above configuration, the player is stopped at the first specific position set as a straight line than at the second specific position set as a bent line. It is considered that the combination is easy to understand. When such an event is used, for example, even if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the result of the game of the second bet number is stopped at the second specific position in the second bet number, the stop result of the game is If the predetermined pattern combination is stopped at the first specific position, the eyes tend to be more focused on the predetermined pattern combination, and it is easy to misunderstand that the predetermined result winning is established. Therefore, it is more preferable to make the outcomes common by using the first specific position and the second specific position.

Features G4. It is set so that the stop position included in the line of the first specific position and the stop position included in the line of the second specific position have a common stop position and a non-common stop position, respectively. The gaming machine according to the feature G3, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, the design becomes easy in order to standardize the outcome of the game by both bets by using the first specific position and the second specific position. Specifically, for example, when a stop roll for stopping a predetermined combination of symbols on a line at a first specific position is to appear in a game with a second bet number, the game with the second bet number is used. Where it is necessary to stop the predetermined combination of symbols at the first specific position while stopping the combination of the resulting symbols at the second specific position, according to the above configuration, in such a situation, the first specific position At the stop position common to the above, the symbols constituting the predetermined pattern combination may be stopped, and at the stop positions not common to the above, the symbols not constituting the predetermined pattern combination may be stopped. This simplifies the pattern configuration in associating the combination of the pattern stopped at the common stop position and the pattern stopped at the non-common stop position with the predetermined pattern combination.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the common stop position has a larger number of stop positions than the non-common stop position.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature G4, among the patterns to be stopped at the second specific position, the number of patterns constituting the predetermined pattern combination is larger than the number of the patterns not constituting the predetermined pattern combination. This makes it easy to divert the combination of various symbols in the game of the first bet number in designing the combination of various symbols in the game of the second bet number with respect to the game of the first bet number. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize the novel playability of the feature G1 while making good use of the existing configuration.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the first bet number is set as a larger number than the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, the number of first bets on the side where the straight line is set as the effective position is larger than the number of second bets on the side where the bent line is set as the effective position. In general, the larger the number of bets, the higher the probability of winning a role (for example, a bonus) and the more benefits that can be obtained in the game. In the above configuration, the player actually plays the game. The number of bets that will be made is set as a straight line. By doing so, for example, in a game with a second bet number, when a predetermined pattern combination is stopped on a straight line which is the first effective position, it is possible to consider the game normally performed. It is possible to easily understand that it is a stop roll corresponding to a predetermined result winning.

Feature G7. A first specific result (for example, a watermelon role) is set as a result of being able to win a lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the number of bets is the first.
A second specific result (for example, a special watermelon role) is set as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the number of bets is the second.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, the privilege corresponding to the first specific result can be given by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the first specific position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result can be given by stopping the second specific pattern combination at the second specific position.
The first specific pattern combination is set so as to be established when the first specific pattern (for example, a watermelon pattern) constituting the first specific pattern combination stops at each of the stop positions. The second specific pattern combination is established when a combination of a plurality of types of second specific patterns (for example, a watermelon pattern and a red bell pattern) constituting the second specific pattern combination is stopped at each of the stop positions. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that the game is set as such.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination that stops at a straight line is set as one type of first specific pattern alignment, while the second specific pattern combination that stops at a bent line has a plurality of types. Since it is set as a combination of the second specific pattern, the first specific pattern combination is easier to catch the eye than the second specific pattern combination, and it is necessary to understand the role in which the prize is established from the stop roll. , Even if the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are stopped, it is easy to understand that the first specific result winning is established. As a result, even if it is the second specific result, it becomes easy to think that the first specific result winning is established.

Feature G8. When the first specific pattern combination stops at the first specific position, the second specific pattern combination stops at the second specific position, and when the second specific pattern combination stops at the second specific position, the above The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the first specific pattern combination stops at the first specific position.

According to the above configuration, for example, in a game with a second bet number, a situation occurs in which the second specific result is a second specific result and the second specific pattern combination stops at the second specific position to win the second specific result. As a stop result, the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the first specific position. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to think that the second specific result is the first specific result.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a game mode
A first game mode (normal game mode) set so that the game medium can be increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game.
A second game mode (specific mode) set so that an increase or decrease in the game medium is less likely to occur than in the first game mode from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game.
Is set,
In the second game mode, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result (for example, the 26th P) in which the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is paid out as the privilege. A gaming machine characterized by having a special watermelon role as a small role).

According to the above configuration, the first game mode is set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium can occur, and the second game mode is set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium is unlikely to occur. Multiple gaming modes can be executed on the gaming machine, and the gaming can be diversified. In particular, since the second game mode is unlikely to increase or decrease the game medium, it can be used as, for example, a practice game mode or a staging game mode, and can be a novel game machine that has never existed before. ..

When setting such a game mode in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is unlikely to occur, for example, it is possible to use all the lottery results as the re-game combination. The re-gaming role is a role that enables the next game to be executed with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in this game without requiring the acceptance of the game medium again. , It is considered to be a preferable role in performing the game mode for the above practice. In particular, when the re-game winning combination is established, the bet number for the next game is generally set automatically without accepting the game medium in the next game. By performing the game mode, there is an advantage that the operability is improved because the acceptance operation is not required.

However, if such a re-game is set as all the winning combinations, the bet number is automatically set as described above. Therefore, the second game mode as the game mode for the practice is set. Even if you try to end the game, the bet number is always set based on the re-game winning prize, so that it may be difficult to end the second game mode. In this case, for example, it is necessary to turn on / off the power of the gaming machine, or add a configuration that allows the gaming mode to be changed even if the bet number is set based on the re-gaming winning.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is inconvenient that the number of bets is automatically set by setting the payout result in which the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out, instead of using all of them as replaying machines. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a novel gaming property of the second gaming mode, which has never been seen before, in combination with the first gaming mode, while avoiding the above.

The "second game mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a second game mode set so that the game medium does not increase or decrease", or "a second game mode that enables the maintenance of the current state of the game medium". It may be expressed as "game mode".

Further, regarding the "first game mode" and the "second game mode", for example, "the first game mode in which the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the first game mode in which the bet number setting means is used". It may be expressed as "a second game mode in which a second bet number different from the bet number is set".

Feature H2. The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game imitating the game of the first game mode can be executed.
When the game is played in the second game mode, a means capable of executing identification notification indicating that the game is a game imitating the game in the first game mode (a process of performing identification display by the display control device 81 is executed). The gaming machine according to feature H1, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, in realizing a novel second game mode such as the practice game mode shown in the feature H1, the position of the second game mode can be clearly recognized by the player.

Feature H3. The first game mode is a game mode executed when the first bet number (3 or 2) is set by the bet number setting means.
The second game mode is described in feature H1 or feature H2, which is a game mode executed when a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode and the second game mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets. In this way, each game mode only needs to be different from the game medium or virtual game medium to be accepted by the receiving means, so that the player can select which game mode to play the game. Is possible. Here, in order to realize a plurality of game modes depending on the number of bets in this way, if one of the game modes is configured by replay as described in the feature H1, it is automatically accompanied by the replay prize. Depending on the setting of the number of bets, the next game will have to be played in the same game mode. In that respect, as described in the feature H1, since the second game mode is realized by the payout result, even if the next game is to be set to the first game mode, a different bet number (first bet number) is used. Is allowed to be set, and the first game mode and the second game mode can be suitably executed.

Features H4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a re-game combination and a transition result corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the normal gaming state to a specific state in which the winning probability of each combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes (for example, 1st PBB, 1st PBB, 1st 2PBB) is set,
A lottery by the lottery means in the first predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal game state in the first game mode and the second predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal game state in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the probability that the result will be won as the re-gaming combination is set to be the same or substantially the same probability.

According to the above configuration, not only the payout result but also the re-game combination is set even in the second game mode in which the game medium is set so as not to increase or decrease. The re-game combination is set with the same or substantially the same winning probability in the first predetermined state of the first game mode and the second predetermined state of the second game mode. Based on the premise that the first game mode is a general game mode, the re-game combination of the second game mode has the same or substantially the same probability as the winning probability of the re-game combination in the general game mode. If is set, it is possible to play the game with the same feeling as usual in both the practice mode and the second game mode as the game mode, and it is possible to improve the significance of the practice mode. Become. Further, assuming that the first game mode is a general game mode as described above, in the general game mode, the winning probability of the re-game combination is set to another small combination or the like. It should be a winning probability, and even if the replaying combination is set with a high probability that the replaying combination will be won except for the other small winning combination, the other small winning combination is set. It can be expected that the payout result will be obtained even in the second game mode with a probability that the winning combination can be established. Then, in the second game mode, almost all the results become re-game combinations, and in rare cases, the payout result is unlikely to occur, and the effect of the feature H1 can be suitably exhibited.

It should be noted that the "substantially the same probability" may be any probability that the player can recognize that the probability is the same, even if the probability is not exactly the same, in other words, the probability is different. It suffices if the probabilities are difficult to make.

Feature H5. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of re-game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the re-game combination are set. And
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the first predetermined state is set as one of the plurality of replaying states.

According to the above configuration, the second predetermined state in the second game mode has the same or substantially the same probability of winning the re-game combination as the re-game state of any one of the plurality of re-game states in the first game mode. It is set to be. By doing so, not only the playability of the first game mode is improved by the plurality of re-game states, but also the second game mode can be positioned as a practice mode corresponding to one of the states. 2 The playability of the game mode is clarified.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the plurality of re-gaming states (normal gaming state, first to third RT states) are not set in the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature H5, the second gaming mode can be simplified. That is, while the first game mode has a plurality of re-game states set, the second game mode as a practice mode does not have a plurality of re-game states set, so that the second game mode is the first game mode. It can be said that it is a simpler mode. By doing so, in designing a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming modes such as a first gaming mode and a second gaming mode using the limited storage area of the gaming machine, the storage area is twice as large as the normal one. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of securing and the inconvenience of simplifying the general first game mode.

The above configuration may be expressed as "the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode is set so that the probability of winning the re-gaming combination does not change in the lottery by the lottery means".

Feature H7. In the first game mode, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-game combination winning and the re-game pattern combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped at the effective position, the re-game combination winning is established. As a privilege corresponding to the above, in the next game, the bet number can be set by the bet number setting means without accepting the game medium or the virtual game medium by the accepting means.
As a kind of the replay pattern combination, the replay pattern (first replay symbol, second replay symbol), which is a pattern constituting the replay pattern combination, stops at the effective position. A pattern combination is set to form a pattern combination for replay.
As the payout result as the lottery result in the second game mode, the re-game payout result (various rips) in which the same number of game media as the bet number is paid out as the privilege when the re-game symbols are aligned and stopped. The gaming machine according to feature H6, which is characterized in that a small role) is set.

If a stop roll corresponding to the re-game payout result appears as in the above configuration, it can be seen as if the re-game role winning has been established because the re-game patterns are apparently aligned and stopped. However, since the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out, the effect of being able to play the next game without requiring a new game medium is the same as the re-game role winning. Therefore, even if the winning probability of the re-game combination is uniformly set in the second game mode, if the winning probability and the appearance rate of the re-game payout result are different, the winning probability of the re-game combination will be as if. You can make it look like it's changing. Therefore, it is possible to bring the game performance closer to the first game mode without setting a plurality of states in which the winning probabilities of the re-game combinations are different in the second game mode.

Feature H8. The drive control means establishes the re-game payout result winning when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the re-game payout result, and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order. When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, the means for preventing the replay payout result winning is not established (execution of the reel control process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to the feature H7, which is characterized by having a function to perform.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the case where the re-game payout result winning is desired to appear and the case where the re-game payout result winning probability is not different. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the feature H7, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of states in which the winning probabilities of the re-game payout results are different, and the configuration of the second gaming mode can be simplified.

Feature H9. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-game payout result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order and the re-game payout result prize is established, the privilege granting means is described. Even when the payout of the same number of gaming media as the number of bets is given as the privilege and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order and the re-game payout result winning is not established, the same number as the number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature H8, characterized in that the payout of the gaming medium is given as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out regardless of whether or not the re-game payout result winning is established at the time of winning the re-game payout result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game playability in which the game medium is not increased or decreased by always playing the game of returning equal sheets regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Feature H10. The game according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that the configuration is such that switching from the first game mode to the second game mode can be executed regardless of the lottery result in the first game mode. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the second game mode is to be executed while the first game mode is being performed, the second game mode can be executed at any time, and the second game mode cannot be executed unless some game result is obtained. In comparison, the degree of freedom of the game is improved.

Features H11. A predetermined effect executing means (a function of performing a process of executing various effects for a specific mode by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect in the second game mode is provided.
When the predetermined effect executing means is switched from the first game mode to the second game mode in a situation where the regulatory conditions (for example, bonus winning) that are satisfied during the first game mode are satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature H10, characterized in that the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted.

According to the above configuration, the switching between the first game mode and the second game mode can be freely performed, but if the regulation condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is restricted even if the mode is switched to the second game mode. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player when the first game mode should not be switched to the second game mode while allowing the free switching between the two game modes.

Feature H12. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means wins a predetermined combination are set.
The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game imitating the game of the first game mode can be executed.
It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) for setting the second game mode.
The setting means is set to any one of the features H1 to H11, which can be set to start the second gaming mode this time from one of the plurality of gaming states in the first gaming mode. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the second game mode can be played as a simulated trial version mode of the first game mode without causing an increase or decrease in the game medium. In order to perform this simulated experience, it is possible to set from which state of the game state to experience in the first game mode by the setting means, so that the game playability of the second game mode is improved.

Feature H13. When a specific operation of the stop operation means subject to a predetermined penalty is performed, a penalty means (a function of executing a penalty process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is provided. Prepare,
The penalties means perform the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, while performing the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H12, wherein the processing is performed in which the disadvantage of the player is reduced when the specific processing is not performed or the specific processing is performed.

According to the above configuration, when a specific operation subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, such a configuration is used in a configuration in which a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. If it is applied uniformly to the game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. That is, in the first place, the above penalty is given to an act of intentionally trying to obtain a game medium in the first game mode, whereas the second game mode is a mode in which an increase or decrease in the game medium cannot be expected. This is because if the above penalty is given to the second game mode as well, it goes against the purpose of the second game mode.

Feature H14. A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a penalty notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification that the specific processing is performed by the penalty means based on the specific operation is provided.
The specific notification executing means performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and also performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to the feature H13, which is characterized by performing the above.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature H13, although no penalty is given in the second gaming mode, the specific notification is performed. This makes it possible to understand that even in the second game mode, if a specific operation is performed, a penalty is given if the first game mode is performed, which is a mode for practice. The significance of this can be improved.

Feature H15. The specific notification executing means is characterized in that it can execute content notification indicating the content of the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, when the specific operation is performed in the second specific mode, although no penalty is given, the content notification indicating the content of the penalty (content of the specific process) is performed. As a result, the fear of the penalty given when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode is notified, the specific operation is prevented from being performed, and the second game mode is the mode for practice. It is possible to improve the significance.

Feature H16. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69), and
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the bet number of the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a game mode
A first game mode (normal game mode) set so that the game medium can be increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game.
A second game mode (specific mode) in which the game medium is not increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing the game.
Is set,
Penal means that can perform specific processing that is disadvantageous to the player when the specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed (a function that executes a penalty process by the main control device 101).
Equipped with
The penalties means perform the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, while performing the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform processing that reduces the disadvantage of the player when the specific processing is not performed or the specific processing is performed.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium may occur and the second game mode set so as not to increase / decrease the game medium are provided. Multiple gaming modes can be executed on the gaming machine, and the gaming can be diversified. In particular, since the second game mode does not increase or decrease the game medium, it can be used as, for example, a practice game mode or a staging game mode, and can be a novel game machine that has never existed before. ..

In addition, when a specific operation subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. Here, if the configuration of such a specific process is uniformly applied to the second game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. That is, in the first place, the above penalty is given to an act of intentionally trying to obtain a game medium in the first game mode, whereas the second game mode is a mode in which an increase or decrease in the game medium cannot be expected. This is because if the above penalty is given to the second game mode as well, it goes against the purpose of the second game mode. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the second game mode, which is a mode for practice.

The "second game mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a second game mode in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is unlikely to occur" or "a second game mode in which the current state of the game medium can be maintained". You may.

Further, regarding the "first game mode" and the "second game mode", for example, "the first game mode in which the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the first game mode in which the bet number setting means is used". It may be expressed as "a second game mode in which a second bet number different from the bet number is set".

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature H group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature H group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 341), a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 410), and the firing thereof. It is provided with a ball passage (guidance rail 400) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (nail 369, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE), and among those game parts, a predetermined one. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a passing portion (general winning opening 361, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiter, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop button as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting an auxiliary effect unit, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board, 102 ... CPU constituting various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means. ..

Claims (1)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media,
A bet number setting means for grasping that a game medium or a virtual game medium has been accepted by the accepting means and setting a bet number for a game up to a predetermined number, and a bet number setting means.
A starting operation means in which the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started when the orbiting body is operated, and
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated.
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the bet number set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number and a second bet number different from the first bet number are provided.
An effective position setting means for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is provided.
When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result is provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second specific result different from the first specific result is provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the first specific pattern combination stops at the first effective position set corresponding to the first bet number by the effective position setting means. , The first privilege corresponding to the first specific result can be given,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, and the second effective position set corresponding to the second bet number by the effective position setting means is different from the first specific pattern combination. 2 When a specific pattern combination is stopped, the second privilege corresponding to the second specific result can be given.
When the second specific pattern combination is stopped at the second effective position on the orbiting body, the position is a position that is not set as an effective position by the effective position setting means when the number of bets is the second. It is characterized in that the symbol is attached so that the first specific symbol combination is stopped at a specific position set as the first effective position by the effective position setting means in the case of one bet number. Gaming machine.

Images